WO2023143092A1 - 一种控制信息的发送方法和通信装置 - Google Patents

一种控制信息的发送方法和通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023143092A1
WO2023143092A1 PCT/CN2023/071864 CN2023071864W WO2023143092A1 WO 2023143092 A1 WO2023143092 A1 WO 2023143092A1 CN 2023071864 W CN2023071864 W CN 2023071864W WO 2023143092 A1 WO2023143092 A1 WO 2023143092A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
resource
resources
terminal
information
communication protocol
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/071864
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
黄海宁
黎超
张天虹
杨帆
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023143092A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023143092A1/zh

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00—Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02—Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/06—Optimizing the usage of the radio link, e.g. header compression, information sizing, discarding information
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
    • H04W72/1263—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W80/00—Wireless network protocols or protocol adaptations to wireless operation
    • H04W80/06—Transport layer protocols, e.g. TCP [Transport Control Protocol] over wireless

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the communication field, and in particular, relates to a method for sending control information and a communication device.
  • the present application provides a method for sending control information and a communication device, which help to avoid resource conflicts.
  • a method for sending control information is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a first terminal, or may be executed by a module or unit applied to the first terminal.
  • the first terminal For the convenience of description, it is collectively referred to as the first terminal hereinafter.
  • the method includes: the first terminal acquires first information, the first information is used to determine resources occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol; the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information ; The first terminal uses the second communication protocol to send control information on the first resource.
  • the first communication protocol is long term evolution-vehicle (long term evolution-vehicle, LTE-V)
  • the second communication protocol is R18 new radio-vehicle (new radio-vehicle, NR-V).
  • the first communication protocol is long term evolution-vehicle (LTE-Sidelink)
  • the second communication protocol is R18 new radio-vehicle (NR-Sidelink).
  • the second communication protocol may be any version of new radio-vehicle (new radio-vehicle, NR-V).
  • the second communication protocol includes R18 NR-V, R19 NR-V, R20 NR-V, etc., which is not limited here.
  • the first information is used to determine the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, or alternatively, the first information is used to indicate the resource occupied by the terminal using the first communication protocol.
  • the resources occupied by the terminal using the first communication protocol may include the resources occupied by the first terminal using the first communication protocol and/or the resources occupied by terminals other than the first terminal (such as the second terminal) using the first communication protocol H.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information; the first terminal uses the second communication protocol to send control information on the first resource” may also be replaced with "the first The terminal sends control information on the first resource by using the second communication protocol according to the first information".
  • the first terminal may determine the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol according to the first information, and further determine that the first resource is an available resource according to the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and use the second Pass The letter protocol sends control information on the first resource.
  • the first terminal considers the resources occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol when determining the available resources for transmitting the control information of the second communication protocol, and can avoid using the resources occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol to transmit
  • the control information of the second communication protocol helps to avoid resource conflict between the transmission of the first communication protocol and the transmission of the second communication protocol.
  • the above technical solution can realize the sending of the control information of the second communication protocol, thereby helping to improve the reliability of data transmission of the second communication protocol.
  • resource indication information for indicating resources occupied by transmission of the second communication protocol may also be used. That is, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource or an unavailable resource according to the first information and the resource indication information transmitted from the second communication protocol. No limitation is imposed in this application.
  • the method further includes: the first terminal acquires second information, the second information is used to instruct the first terminal to send the control information, the
  • the control information includes at least one of the following: hybrid automatic repeat request (hybrid automatic repeat request, HARQ) information, channel state information (channel state information, CSI) feedback information, or resource conflict indication information.
  • the second information is carried in second-level sidelink control information (sidelink control information, SCI).
  • sidelink control information SCI
  • the second information is HARQ enabling information in the SCI
  • the control information is HARQ information. It can be understood that if the first terminal receives data and second information (including HARQ enabling information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends the HARQ information corresponding to the data to the second terminal, that is, the control information is HARQ information.
  • the second information is CSI trigger information in the SCI
  • the control information is CSI feedback information. It can be understood that, if the first terminal receives data and second information (including CSI trigger information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends CSI feedback information to the second terminal, that is, the control information is CSI feedback information.
  • the second information is trigger information of resource conflict indication information in the SCI
  • the control information is resource conflict indication information. It can be understood that if the first terminal receives the data and the second information (including the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends the resource conflict indication information to the second terminal, that is, the control information is resource conflict Instructions.
  • the first terminal when the first terminal obtains the second information for instructing the first terminal to send the control information, the first terminal uses the second communication protocol to send the control information on the first resource, which helps to avoid resource waste.
  • the control information is HARQ information
  • using HARQ feedback can improve the reliability of data transmission.
  • the control information is CSI feedback information
  • using CSI feedback can improve link adaptation (for example, help the second terminal triggering CSI feedback to better select modulation and coding scheme (modulation and coding scheme, MCS)), improve system efficiency .
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the control information is the resource conflict indication information
  • using the resource conflict indication information can improve the reliability of data transmission.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information, including: When the resource does not meet a preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: it overlaps with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than The first threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when the first terminal selects resources for transmitting data, and the candidate resource is L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, and L is greater than or equal to Integer of 1.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the candidate resource that can be used to transmit data where the first resource is located is an unavailable resource
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the above energy can be used in received signal strength indicator (received signal strength indicator, RSSI), signal to noise ratio (signal noise ratio, SNR), or signal to interference plus noise ratio (signal to interference plus noise ratio, SINR) at least one to represent.
  • RSSI received signal strength indicator
  • SNR signal to noise ratio
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • the terminal determines whether the data transmission of the terminal itself will be interfered by detecting the energy of resources occupied by other devices.
  • the above method also judges whether it will interfere with the transmission of the terminal's own control information by detecting the energy of the resources occupied by other devices, thereby ensuring the transmission of control information. Low interference, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of control information.
  • the above-mentioned energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity measured by the applicable reference signal (RS), it can reflect the entire symbol or slot channel occupancy on the
  • determining, by the first terminal, that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information includes: When none of the candidate resources included in a time unit satisfies a preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the first threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when the first terminal performs resource selection for transmitting data, and the candidate resource is a continuous L frequency domain in the first time unit unit, L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the terminal when determining whether the first resource (the resource for transmitting control information) is available, it is also determined whether it will interfere with the transmission of the terminal's own control information by detecting the energy of the resources occupied by other devices, ensuring that the control information Low interference of the transmission resources, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information. Further, when judging that a certain candidate resource is available, assuming that when the terminal sends control information on the first resource included in the candidate resource, some of the other candidate resources included in the first time unit are unavailable, which means that the first communication protocol The module transmits in the first time unit, and at this time, the terminal may have conflicts between sending and receiving between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module.
  • the method is used again when the candidate resources included in the first time unit are all low-interference resources, and at this time, the problem of sending and receiving conflict between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module can be effectively avoided.
  • the above energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity measured by the applicable reference signal RS, it can reflect the channel occupancy on the entire symbol or time slot .
  • the first terminal according to the The first information determining that the first resource is an available resource includes: when the candidate resource where the first resource is located does not meet a preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset The condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than the second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is the candidate resource when the first terminal performs resource selection for the transmission control information, and the The candidate resources are L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the candidate resource where the first resource is located and which can be used to transmit the control information is an unavailable resource
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the first resource the resource for transmitting control information
  • it is judged whether it will interfere with the terminal's own control by detecting the energy of the transmission of the first communication protocol by other devices in the first time unit
  • the transmission of the information ensures the low interference of the transmission resources of the control information, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information.
  • the above energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity measured by the applicable reference signal RS, it can reflect the channel occupancy on the entire symbol or time slot .
  • determining, by the first terminal, that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information includes: When none of the candidate resources included in a time unit satisfies a preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when performing resource selection for the first terminal transmission control information, and the candidate resource is a continuous L frequency domain unit in the first time unit , L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the terminal when determining whether the first resource (the resource for transmitting control information) is available, it is judged whether it will interfere with the terminal's own control by detecting the energy of the transmission of the first communication protocol by other devices in the first time unit.
  • the transmission of the information ensures the low interference of the transmission resources of the control information, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information. Since some of the candidate resources included in the first time unit are available, some are unavailable, which means that the first communication protocol module transmits in the first time unit, and at this time, the terminal may have a communication between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module. Send and receive conflict issues.
  • the method is used again when the candidate resources included in the first time unit are all low-interference resources, and at this time, the problem of sending and receiving conflict between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module can be effectively avoided.
  • the above energy is at least one
  • the energy on a symbol or a time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR) has a coarser granularity than the energy measured by the applicable RS, and can reflect the channel occupancy situation on the entire symbol or time slot.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels in the first time slot.
  • the size of candidate resources is defined, which ensures the integrity of the technical solution of the present application.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels of P symbols in the first time slot, where P is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the time-domain granularity of candidate resources for sending control information is defined, which can be 1 or 2 symbols (the sending symbol of the physical sidelink feedback channel (PSFCH), the sending symbol of PSFCH and Replica symbols of the transmitted symbols of PSFCH).
  • PSFCH physical sidelink feedback channel
  • the time-domain granularity of the candidate resource for sending control information may be different from the time-domain granularity of the candidate resource for sending data, which ensures the accuracy of judging the degree of interference.
  • the frequency domain resource may be one or more physical resource blocks (physical resource block, PRB).
  • the size of candidate resources is defined, which ensures the integrity of the technical solution of the present application.
  • the granularity of the PRB is finer than that of the subchannel, and it can be more prepared to judge whether the candidate resource has interference.
  • the second threshold is from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the second threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the second threshold may be determined according to the priority value of the HARQ information to be sent by the first terminal and the corresponding priority value of the transmission resource of the first communication protocol overlapping with the candidate resource.
  • the second threshold may be associated with at least one of MCS and channel busy ratio (channel busy ratio, CBR).
  • the second threshold is used to judge the degree of interference of candidate resources for sending control information. Setting the threshold separately for the candidate resources of the control information can make it more accurate to judge the degree of interference of the candidate resources for sending the control information, and also gives flexibility in configuration of the base station.
  • the first terminal determining that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information includes: when the first resource does not meet the predetermined When setting a condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than a third threshold.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the first terminal directly determines whether the first resource is an available resource according to a preset condition. When the first resource does not meet the foregoing preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource. When the first resource satisfies the foregoing preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the above method judges whether it will interfere with the terminal itself by detecting the energy of the transmission of the first communication protocol by other devices in the first time unit
  • the transmission of the control information ensures the low interference of the transmission resources of the control information, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information.
  • the energy mentioned above is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or or SINR), which is coarser than the energy granularity of the applicable RS measurement, and can reflect the channel occupancy of the entire symbol or time slot.
  • the third threshold is from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the third threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the third threshold is used to judge the degree of interference of candidate resources for sending control information. Setting the threshold separately for the first resource of the control information can make the judgment of the degree of interference of the first resource for sending the control information more accurate, and also give flexibility in configuration of the base station.
  • the signal quality is characterized by at least one of the following information: reference signal received power (reference signal received power, RSRP), RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the first resource is not used for data transmission.
  • the first resource is not used for data transmission. It can be understood that the first terminal does not perform rate matching on the first resource when performing data rate matching.
  • the terminals of the transmitting and receiving parties may have different determination results on whether the first resource is available, which will lead to conflicts between transmitting and receiving (for example, The received data collides with the transmitted HARQ information, or the received HARQ information conflicts with the transmitted data). If the first resource is not used for data transmission, conflicts between sending and receiving can be avoided.
  • the time domain unit where the first resource is located is not used for data transmission. In this way, sending and receiving conflicts can be avoided between the terminals of the sending and receiving parties.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following information: SCI, or a signal quality measurement value corresponding to the SCI, and the SCI Including the resource indication information of the transmission of the first communication protocol and/or the resource reservation field of the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the SCI can also be understood as a sidelink assignment (SA).
  • SA sidelink assignment
  • the first information includes PSCCH decoding information and RSRP measurement information.
  • the first information includes PSCCH decoding information and energy measurement values.
  • the first information includes PSCCH decoding information and RSRP measurement information in one time domain resource set.
  • the method for determining the location of the time-domain resource set includes at least one of the following: pre-definition, pre-configuration, transmission by the first communication protocol module of the first terminal to the second communication protocol module, determination by the second communication protocol module and sending to of the first communication protocol module.
  • the indication manner of the position of the time domain resource set includes at least one of the following items: the start position of the time domain resource set, the end position of the time domain resource set, the length of the time domain resource set, and the end position of the time domain resource set is the position where the second communication protocol module receives the indication information of the time domain resource set, and the end position of the time domain resource set is a time interval before the position where the second communication protocol module receives the indication information of the time domain resource set.
  • the time interval is the transmission (sending or transparent transmission) time from the first communication protocol module to the second communication protocol module.
  • the reference point of the starting position of the time domain resource set is the system frame number, such as the position where the direct frame number (direct frame number, DFN) is 0, or the position where the system frame number (system frame number, SFN) is 0.
  • the starting position of the set of time resources is determined by this reference point and a time offset value.
  • the time-domain resource set is continuous, for example, the time-domain resource set is a time window.
  • the first communication protocol and The resource pools of the second communication protocol use the same time-frequency resource.
  • control information is fed back to the second terminal when the first terminal successfully decodes the first data from the second terminal Acknowledgment (acknowledgment, ACK) information; or, the control information is negative acknowledgment (NACK) information fed back to the second terminal when the first terminal fails to successfully decode the first data from the second terminal.
  • Acknowledgment acknowledgement
  • NACK negative acknowledgment
  • control information may be ACK or NACK of multicast feedback option 1, or NACK only of multicast feedback option 2 (only if the first terminal does not successfully decode the first data from the second terminal) NACK information fed back to the second terminal), or unicast ACK or NACK.
  • a method for sending data is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a second terminal, or may be executed by a module or unit applied to the second terminal.
  • the second terminal For the convenience of description, it is collectively referred to as the second terminal hereinafter.
  • the method includes: the second terminal acquires first information, the first information is used to indicate the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol; the second terminal determines that the first resource is available according to the first information resources, the first resource is a resource used to transmit control information in the second communication protocol; the second terminal determines a second resource according to the first resource, and the second resource is used in the second communication protocol A resource for transmitting the first data; the second terminal sends the first data to the first terminal on the second resource by using the second communication protocol.
  • the first communication protocol is LTE-V
  • the second communication protocol is R18 NR-V.
  • the first communication protocol is LTE-Sidelink
  • the second communication protocol is R18 NR-Sidelink.
  • the second communication protocol may be any version of NR-V.
  • the second communication protocol includes R18 NR-V, R19 NR-V, R20 NR-V, etc., which is not limited here.
  • the first information is used to determine the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, or alternatively, the first information is used to indicate the resource occupied by the terminal using the first communication protocol.
  • the resources occupied by the terminal using the first communication protocol may include the resources occupied by the second terminal using the first communication protocol and/or the resources occupied by terminals other than the second terminal (such as the first terminal) using the first communication protocol H.
  • the second terminal may determine the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol according to the first information, and then determine the first resource as an available resource according to the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and determine the first resource as an available resource according to the first information.
  • the resource identifies a second resource for transmitting data of the second communication protocol.
  • the second terminal determines that the second resource used to transmit the data of the second communication protocol satisfies at the same time: the second resource is an available resource, and the resource corresponding to the second resource is used to transmit the control information of the second communication protocol for available resources.
  • the second terminal considers the resources occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol when determining the available resources for transmitting the control information of the second communication protocol, and can avoid using the resources occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol to transmit
  • the control information of the second communication protocol helps to avoid resource conflict between the transmission of the first communication protocol and the transmission of the second communication protocol.
  • the second resource satisfies at the same time that: the second resource is an available resource, and the resource corresponding to the second resource for transmitting the control information of the second communication protocol is an available resource, thereby helping to improve data throughput of the second communication protocol. transmission reliability.
  • resource indication information for indicating resources occupied by transmission of the second communication protocol may also be used. That is, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource or an unavailable resource according to the first information and the resource indication information transmitted from the second communication protocol. No limitation is imposed in this application.
  • the method further includes: the second terminal sending second information to the first terminal, where the second information is used to instruct the first terminal to send Control information, where the control information includes at least one of the following: HARQ information, CSI feedback information, or resource conflict indication information. For example, when the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information, the second terminal sends the second information to the first terminal.
  • the second information is carried in the second-level SCI.
  • the second information is HARQ enabling information in the SCI
  • the control information is HARQ information. It can be understood that if the first terminal receives data and second information (including HARQ enabling information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends the HARQ information corresponding to the data to the second terminal, that is, the control information is HARQ information.
  • the second information is CSI trigger information in the SCI
  • the control information is CSI feedback information. It can be understood that, if the first terminal receives data and second information (including CSI trigger information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends CSI feedback information to the second terminal, that is, the control information is CSI feedback information.
  • the second information is trigger information of resource conflict indication information in the SCI
  • the control information is resource conflict indication information. It can be understood that if the first terminal receives the data and the second information (including the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends the resource conflict indication information to the second terminal, that is, the control information is resource conflict Instructions.
  • HARQ enabling information and CSI triggering information are indicated in the second-level SCI.
  • the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information is indicated in the first-level SCI.
  • the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information may be time domain resource indication information and frequency domain resource indication information in the first level SCI.
  • the second terminal instructs the first terminal to send control information, so that the first terminal only uses the second communication protocol to send control information on the first resource when receiving the instruction from the second terminal, which helps to avoid wasting resources.
  • the control information is CSI feedback information
  • using CSI feedback can improve link adaptation (for example, help the second terminal triggering CSI feedback to better select an MCS), and improve system efficiency.
  • the control information is the resource conflict indication information
  • using the resource conflict indication information can improve the reliability of data transmission.
  • the second resource corresponding to the first resource is a resource in a first candidate resource set
  • the first candidate resource set is The second terminal is a set of candidate resources when performing resource selection for data transmission.
  • the second terminal determines a first candidate resource set according to the first resource, and the first candidate resource set is a candidate resource set when the second terminal selects resources for transmitting data; The second resource is determined in the candidate resource set.
  • the first candidate resource set determined by the second terminal satisfies that: the resources in the first candidate resource set are available resources, and the resources corresponding to the resources for transmitting control information are also available resources.
  • the second resource satisfies at the same time: the second resource is an available resource, and the resource corresponding to the second resource for transmitting the control information of the second communication protocol is an available resource, which helps to improve the second The reliability of the data transmission of the communication protocol.
  • the second terminal determining a second resource according to the first resource includes: the second terminal determining a second candidate resource set , the second candidate resource set is a candidate resource set when the second terminal selects resources for transmitting data; the second terminal determines the second candidate resource set from the second candidate resource set according to the first resource secondary resource.
  • the second resource satisfies at the same time: the second resource is an available resource, and corresponds to the second resource
  • the resource used to transmit the control information of the second communication protocol is an available resource, which helps to improve the reliability of data transmission of the second communication protocol.
  • determining, by the second terminal, that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information includes: When the candidate resource does not meet a preset condition, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is low At the first threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is the candidate resource when the second terminal performs resource selection for transmitting data, and the candidate resource is consecutive L frequency domain units in the first time unit, and L is greater than or An integer equal to 1.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the terminal determines whether the data transmission of the terminal itself will be interfered by detecting the energy of resources occupied by other devices.
  • the above method also judges whether it will interfere with the transmission of the terminal's own control information by detecting the energy of the resources occupied by other devices, thereby ensuring the transmission of control information. Low interference, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of control information.
  • the above-mentioned energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity of applicable RS measurement, it can reflect the channel occupancy situation on the whole symbol or time slot.
  • determining, by the second terminal, that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information includes: When none of the candidate resources included in the first time unit satisfies a preset condition, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: the resource occupied by the transmission with the first communication protocol The resources overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the first threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when the second terminal performs resource selection for transmitting data, and the candidate resource is a continuous L frequency in the first time unit Domain unit, L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the terminal when determining whether the first resource (the resource for transmitting control information) is available, it is also determined whether it will interfere with the transmission of the terminal's own control information by detecting the energy of the resources occupied by other devices, ensuring that the control information Low interference of the transmission resources, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information. Further, in judging a certain When the candidate resource is available, it is assumed that when the terminal sends control information on the first resource included in the candidate resource, because some other candidate resources included in the first time unit are not available, this means that the first communication protocol module is in the first time unit There is transmission, and at this time, the terminal may have a conflict between sending and receiving between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module.
  • the method is used again when the candidate resources included in the first time unit are all low-interference resources, and at this time, the problem of sending and receiving conflict between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module can be effectively avoided.
  • the above energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity measured by the applicable reference signal RS, it can reflect the channel occupancy on the entire symbol or time slot .
  • determining, by the second terminal, that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information includes: When the candidate resource does not meet a preset condition, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is low at the second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when performing resource selection for transmission control information, and the candidate resource is L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the first resource the resource for transmitting control information
  • it is judged whether it will interfere with the terminal's own control by detecting the energy of the transmission of the first communication protocol by other devices in the first time unit
  • the transmission of the information ensures the low interference of the transmission resources of the control information, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information.
  • the above-mentioned energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity measured by the applicable reference signal RS, it can reflect the channel occupancy on the entire symbol or time slot .
  • determining, by the second terminal, that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information includes: When none of the candidate resources included in the first time unit satisfies a preset condition, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: the resource occupied by the transmission with the first communication protocol The resources overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when performing resource selection for transmission control information, and the candidate resource is consecutive L frequency domain units in the first time unit, and L is greater than or an integer equal to 1.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the terminal when determining whether the first resource (the resource for transmitting control information) is available, it is judged whether it will interfere with the terminal's own control by detecting the energy of the transmission of the first communication protocol by other devices in the first time unit.
  • the transmission of the information ensures the low interference of the transmission resources of the control information, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information. Since some of the candidate resources included in the first time unit are available, some are unavailable, which means that the first communication protocol module transmits in the first time unit, and at this time, the terminal may have a communication between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module. Send and receive conflict issues.
  • the method is used again when the candidate resources included in the first time unit are all low-interference resources, and at this time, the problem of sending and receiving conflict between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module can be effectively avoided.
  • the above-mentioned energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity of applicable RS measurement, it can reflect the channel occupancy situation on the whole symbol or time slot.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels in the first time slot.
  • the size of candidate resources is defined, which ensures the integrity of the technical solution of the present application.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels of P symbols in the first time slot, where P is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the time domain granularity of candidate resources for sending control information is defined, which can be 1 or 2 symbols (PSFCH transmission symbols, PSFCH transmission symbols and PSFCH replication symbols).
  • the integrity of the technical solution of the present application is guaranteed.
  • the time-domain granularity of the candidate resource for sending control information may be different from the time-domain granularity of the candidate resource for sending data, which ensures the accuracy of judging the degree of interference.
  • the frequency domain resource may be one or more PRBs.
  • the size of candidate resources is defined, which ensures the integrity of the technical solution of the present application.
  • the granularity of the PRB is finer than that of the subchannel, and it can be more prepared to judge whether the candidate resource has interference.
  • the second threshold is from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the second threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the second threshold may be determined according to the priority value of the HARQ information to be sent by the first terminal and the corresponding priority value of the LTE-V transmission resource overlapping with the candidate resource.
  • the second threshold may be associated with at least one of MCS, CBR.
  • the second threshold is used to judge the degree of interference of candidate resources for sending control information. Setting the threshold separately for the candidate resources of the control information can make it more accurate to judge the degree of interference of the candidate resources for sending the control information, and also gives flexibility in configuration of the base station.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, including: when the first resource does not meet When a preset condition is set, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than a third threshold .
  • the second terminal directly determines whether the first resource is an available resource according to the preset condition. When the first resource does not satisfy the foregoing preset condition, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource. When the first resource satisfies the foregoing preset condition, the first terminal determines that the second resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the above method judges whether it will interfere with the terminal itself by detecting the energy of the transmission of the first communication protocol by other devices in the first time unit
  • the transmission of the control information ensures the low interference of the transmission resources of the control information, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information.
  • the above-mentioned energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity of applicable RS measurement, it can reflect the channel occupancy situation on the whole symbol or time slot.
  • the third threshold is from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the third threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the third threshold is used to judge the degree of interference of candidate resources for sending control information. Setting the threshold separately for the first resource of the control information can make the judgment of the degree of interference of the first resource for sending the control information more accurate, and also give flexibility in configuration of the base station.
  • the signal quality is characterized by at least one of the following information: RSRP, RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the first resource is not used for data transmission.
  • the first resource is not used for data transmission. It can be understood that the second terminal does not perform rate matching on the first resource when performing data rate matching.
  • the terminals of the transmitting and receiving parties may have different determination results on whether the first resource is available, which will lead to conflicts between transmitting and receiving (for example, The received data collides with the transmitted HARQ information, or the received HARQ information conflicts with the transmitted data). If the first resource is not used for data transmission, conflicts between sending and receiving can be avoided.
  • the time domain unit where the first resource is located is not used for data transmission. In this way, sending and receiving conflicts can be avoided between the terminals of the sending and receiving parties.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following information: SCI, or a signal quality measurement value corresponding to the SCI, and the SCI Including the resource indication information of the transmission of the first communication protocol and/or the resource reservation field of the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the SCI can also be understood as SA.
  • the first information includes PSCCH decoding information and RSRP measurement information.
  • the first information includes PSCCH decoding information and energy measurement values.
  • the first information includes PSCCH decoding information and RSRP measurement information in one time domain resource set.
  • the method for determining the location of the time-domain resource set includes at least one of the following: pre-definition, pre-configuration, transmission by the first communication protocol module of the first terminal to the second communication protocol module, determination by the second communication protocol module and sending to of the first communication protocol module.
  • the indication manner of the position of the time domain resource set includes at least one of the following items: the start position of the time domain resource set, the end position of the time domain resource set, the length of the time domain resource set, and the end position of the time domain resource set is the position where the second communication protocol module receives the indication information of the time domain resource set, and the end position of the time domain resource set is a time interval before the position where the second communication protocol module receives the indication information of the time domain resource set. during this time The interval is the transmission (sending or transparent transmission) time from the first communication protocol module to the second communication protocol module.
  • the reference point of the starting position of the time-domain resource set is the system frame number, such as the position where DFN is 0, or the position where SFN is 0.
  • the starting position of the set of time resources is determined by this reference point and a time offset value.
  • the time-domain resource set is continuous, for example, the time-domain resource set is a time window.
  • the first communication protocol and the second communication protocol use the same set of time-frequency resources.
  • control information is feedback to the second terminal when the first terminal successfully decodes the first data from the second terminal ACK information; or, the control information is NACK information fed back to the second terminal when the first terminal fails to successfully decode the first data from the second terminal.
  • control information may be ACK or NACK of multicast feedback option 1, or NACK only of multicast feedback option 2 (only if the first terminal does not successfully decode the first data from the second terminal) NACK information fed back to the second terminal), or unicast ACK or NACK.
  • a method for receiving control information is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a second terminal, or may be executed by a module or unit applied to the second terminal.
  • the second terminal For the convenience of description, it is collectively referred to as the second terminal hereinafter.
  • the method includes: the second terminal sends first data to the first terminal on a second resource using a second communication protocol; the second terminal sends second information corresponding to the first data to the first terminal , the second information is used to instruct the first terminal to send control information; the second terminal obtains first information, and the first information is used to indicate resources occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol; the second The second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information; the second terminal receives the control information on the first resource by using the second communication protocol.
  • the first communication protocol is LTE-V
  • the second communication protocol is R18 NR-V.
  • the first communication protocol is LTE-Sidelink
  • the second communication protocol is R18 NR-Sidelink.
  • the second communication protocol may be any version of NR-V.
  • the second communication protocol includes R18 NR-V, R19 NR-V, R20 NR-V, etc., which is not limited here.
  • control information includes at least one of the following: HARQ information, CSI feedback information, or resource conflict indication information.
  • the second information corresponding to the first data can be understood as the second information sent simultaneously with the first data, the second information is used to schedule the first data, and the second information is used to trigger the first terminal to send information related to the first data.
  • Control information for example, HARQ information, resource conflict indication information, CSI feedback information, etc.
  • the second information is a PSCCH that schedules a PSSCH that carries the first data.
  • the second information is carried in the second-level SCI.
  • the second information is HARQ enabling information in the SCI
  • the control information is HARQ information. It can be understood that if the first terminal receives data and second information (including HARQ enabling information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends the HARQ information corresponding to the data to the second terminal, that is, the control information is HARQ information.
  • the second information is CSI trigger information in the SCI
  • the control information is CSI feedback information. It can be understood that, if the first terminal receives data and second information (including CSI trigger information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends CSI feedback information to the second terminal, that is, the control information is CSI feedback information.
  • the second information is trigger information of resource conflict indication information in the SCI
  • the control information is resource conflict indication information. It can be understood that if the first terminal receives the data and the second information (including the resource conflict indicator) from the second terminal display information trigger information), the first terminal sends resource conflict indication information to the second terminal, that is, the control information is resource conflict indication information.
  • HARQ enabling information and CSI triggering information are indicated in the second-level SCI.
  • the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information is indicated in the first-level SCI.
  • the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information may be time domain resource indication information and frequency domain resource indication information in the first level SCI.
  • the first information is used to determine the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, or alternatively, the first information is used to indicate the resource occupied by the terminal using the first communication protocol.
  • the resources occupied by the terminal using the first communication protocol may include the resources occupied by the second terminal using the first communication protocol and/or the resources occupied by terminals other than the second terminal (such as the first terminal) using the first communication protocol H.
  • the second terminal instructs the first terminal to send control information to the second terminal, determines the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol according to the first information, and determines the resource occupied by the transmission according to the first communication protocol
  • control information of the second communication protocol is received on the first resource.
  • the second terminal considers the resources occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol when determining the available resources for transmitting the control information of the second communication protocol, and can avoid using the resources occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol to transmit
  • the control information of the second communication protocol helps to avoid resource conflict between the transmission of the first communication protocol and the transmission of the second communication protocol.
  • the above technical solution can realize the reception of the control information of the second communication protocol, thereby helping to improve the reliability of data transmission of the second communication protocol.
  • the second terminal instructs the first terminal to send control information, so that the first terminal only uses the second communication protocol to send control information on the first resource when receiving the instruction from the second terminal, which helps to avoid waste of resources .
  • the control information is CSI feedback information
  • using CSI feedback can improve link adaptation (for example, help the second terminal triggering CSI feedback to better select an MCS), and improve system efficiency.
  • the control information is the resource conflict indication information
  • using the resource conflict indication information can improve the reliability of data transmission.
  • resource indication information for indicating resources occupied by transmission of the second communication protocol may also be used. That is, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource or an unavailable resource according to the first information and the resource indication information transmitted from the second communication protocol. No limitation is imposed in this application.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information, including: when the candidate resource where the first resource is located does not meet the preset condition, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: it overlaps with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than a first threshold; wherein , the candidate resources are candidate resources when the second terminal selects resources for transmitting data, the candidate resources are L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the terminal when selecting resources for data, the terminal detects the resources occupied by other devices energy to determine whether it will interfere with the data transmission of the terminal itself.
  • the above method also judges whether it will interfere with the transmission of the terminal's own control information by detecting the energy of the resources occupied by other devices, thereby ensuring the transmission of control information. Low interference, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of control information.
  • the above-mentioned energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity of applicable RS measurement, it can reflect the channel occupancy situation on the whole symbol or time slot.
  • the second terminal determining, according to the first information, that the first resource is an available resource includes: When none of the candidate resources included in the first time unit satisfies a preset condition, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: the resource occupied by the transmission with the first communication protocol The resources overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the first threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when the second terminal performs resource selection for transmitting data, and the candidate resource is a continuous L frequency in the first time unit Domain unit, L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the terminal when determining whether the first resource (the resource for transmitting control information) is available, it is also determined whether it will interfere with the transmission of the terminal's own control information by detecting the energy of the resources occupied by other devices, ensuring that the control information Low interference of the transmission resources, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information. Further, when judging that a certain candidate resource is available, assuming that when the terminal sends control information on the first resource included in the candidate resource, some of the other candidate resources included in the first time unit are unavailable, which means that the first communication protocol The module transmits in the first time unit, and at this time, the terminal may have conflicts between sending and receiving between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module.
  • the method is used again when the candidate resources included in the first time unit are all low-interference resources, and at this time, the problem of sending and receiving conflict between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module can be effectively avoided.
  • the above energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity measured by the applicable reference signal RS, it can reflect the channel occupancy on the entire symbol or time slot .
  • the second terminal determining, according to the first information, that the first resource is an available resource includes: When the candidate resource does not meet a preset condition, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is low at the second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when performing resource selection for transmission control information, and the candidate resource is L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the first resource the resource for transmitting control information
  • it is judged whether it will interfere with the terminal's own control by detecting the energy of the transmission of the first communication protocol by other devices in the first time unit
  • the transmission of the information ensures the low interference of the transmission resources of the control information, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information.
  • the above energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity measured by the applicable reference signal RS, it can reflect the channel occupancy on the entire symbol or time slot .
  • the second terminal determining, according to the first information, that the first resource is an available resource includes: When none of the candidate resources included in the first time unit satisfies a preset condition, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: the resource occupied by the transmission with the first communication protocol The resources overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when performing resource selection for transmission control information, and the candidate resource is consecutive L frequency domain units in the first time unit, and L is greater than or an integer equal to 1.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the terminal when determining whether the first resource (the resource for transmitting control information) is available, it is judged whether it will interfere with the terminal's own control by detecting the energy of the transmission of the first communication protocol by other devices in the first time unit.
  • the transmission of the information ensures the low interference of the transmission resources of the control information, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information. Since some of the candidate resources included in the first time unit are available, some are unavailable, which means that the first communication protocol module transmits in the first time unit, and at this time, the terminal may have a communication between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module. Send and receive conflict issues.
  • the method is used again when the candidate resources included in the first time unit are all low-interference resources, and at this time, the problem of sending and receiving conflict between the first communication protocol module and the second communication protocol module can be effectively avoided.
  • the above-mentioned energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity of applicable RS measurement, it can reflect the channel occupancy situation on the whole symbol or time slot.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels in the first time slot.
  • the size of candidate resources is defined, which ensures the integrity of the technical solution of the present application.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels of P symbols in the first time slot, where P is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the time-domain granularity of candidate resources for sending control information is defined, which can be 1 or 2 symbols (transmitted symbols of PSFCH, transmitted symbols of PSFCH and duplicate symbols of transmitted symbols of PSFCH).
  • the integrity of the technical solution of the present application is guaranteed.
  • the time-domain granularity of the candidate resource for sending control information may be different from the time-domain granularity of the candidate resource for sending data, which ensures the accuracy of judging the degree of interference.
  • the frequency domain resource may be one or more PRBs.
  • the size of candidate resources is defined, which ensures the integrity of the technical solution of the present application.
  • the granularity of the PRB is finer than that of the subchannel, and it can be more prepared to judge whether the candidate resource has interference.
  • the second threshold is from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the second threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the second threshold may be determined according to the priority value of the HARQ information to be sent by the first terminal and the corresponding priority value of the LTE-V transmission resource overlapping with the candidate resource.
  • the second threshold may be associated with at least one of MCS, CBR.
  • the second threshold is used to judge the degree of interference of candidate resources for sending control information. Setting the threshold separately for the candidate resources of the control information can make it more accurate to judge the degree of interference of the candidate resources for sending the control information, and also gives flexibility in configuration of the base station.
  • the second terminal determining, according to the first information, that the first resource is an available resource includes: when the first resource does not meet When a preset condition is set, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than a third threshold .
  • the second terminal directly determines whether the first resource is an available resource according to the preset condition. When the first resource does not satisfy the foregoing preset condition, the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource. When the first resource satisfies the foregoing preset condition, the first terminal determines that the second resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the signal quality is a signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the signal quality is energy on a time-domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the signal quality may be the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the energy on the first time slot.
  • the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the above method judges whether it will interfere with the terminal itself by detecting the energy of the transmission of the first communication protocol by other devices in the first time unit
  • the transmission of the control information ensures the low interference of the transmission resources of the control information, thereby ensuring the reliability of the transmission of the control information.
  • the above-mentioned energy is the energy on at least one symbol or one time slot (such as RSSI or SNR or SINR), compared with the energy granularity of applicable RS measurement, it can reflect the channel occupancy situation on the whole symbol or time slot.
  • the third threshold is from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the third threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the third threshold is used to judge the degree of interference of candidate resources for sending control information. Setting the threshold separately for the first resource of the control information can make the judgment of the degree of interference of the first resource for sending the control information more accurate, and also give flexibility in configuration of the base station.
  • the signal quality is characterized by at least one of the following information: RSRP, RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the first resource is not used for data transmission.
  • the first resource is not used for data transmission. It can be understood that the second terminal does not perform rate matching on the first resource when performing data rate matching.
  • the terminals of the transmitting and receiving parties may have different determination results on whether the first resource is available, which will lead to conflicts between transmitting and receiving (for example, The received data collides with the transmitted HARQ information, or the received HARQ information conflicts with the transmitted data). If the first resource is not used for data transmission, conflicts between sending and receiving can be avoided.
  • the time domain unit where the first resource is located is not used for data transmission. In this way, sending and receiving conflicts can be avoided between the terminals of the sending and receiving parties.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following information: SCI, or a signal quality corresponding to the SCI
  • the SCI includes the The resource indication information of the transmission of the first communication protocol and/or the resource reservation field of the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the SCI can also be understood as SA.
  • the first information includes PSCCH decoding information and RSRP measurement information.
  • the first information includes PSCCH decoding information and energy measurement values.
  • the first information includes PSCCH decoding information and RSRP measurement information in one time domain resource set.
  • the method for determining the location of the time-domain resource set includes at least one of the following: pre-definition, pre-configuration, transmission by the first communication protocol module of the first terminal to the second communication protocol module, determination by the second communication protocol module and sending to of the first communication protocol module.
  • the indication manner of the position of the time domain resource set includes at least one of the following items: the start position of the time domain resource set, the end position of the time domain resource set, the length of the time domain resource set, and the end position of the time domain resource set is the position where the second communication protocol module receives the indication information of the time domain resource set, and the end position of the time domain resource set is a time interval before the position where the second communication protocol module receives the indication information of the time domain resource set.
  • the time interval is the transmission (sending or transparent transmission) time from the first communication protocol module to the second communication protocol module.
  • the reference point of the starting position of the time-domain resource set is the system frame number, such as the position where DFN is 0, or the position where SFN is 0.
  • the starting position of the set of time resources is determined by this reference point and a time offset value.
  • the time-domain resource set is continuous, for example, the time-domain resource set is a time window.
  • the first communication protocol and the second communication protocol use the same set of time-frequency resources.
  • control information is fed back to the second terminal when the first terminal successfully decodes the first data from the second terminal ACK information; or, the control information is NACK information fed back to the second terminal when the first terminal fails to successfully decode the first data from the second terminal.
  • control information may be ACK or NACK of multicast feedback option 1, or NACK only of multicast feedback option 2 (only if the first terminal does not successfully decode the first data from the second terminal) NACK information fed back to the second terminal), or unicast ACK or NACK.
  • a method for sending control information is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a first terminal, or may be executed by a module or unit applied to the first terminal.
  • the first terminal For convenience of description, it is collectively referred to as the first terminal hereinafter.
  • the method includes: the first terminal determines the third resource from the set of control resources; the first terminal uses the second communication The communication protocol sends control information on the third resource; wherein, the first resource set in the control resource set is configured to transmit control information of the third communication protocol, and the third resource and the first resource set are configured to transmit control information of the third communication protocol.
  • the resources in the resource collection are different.
  • the second communication protocol is R18 NR-V
  • the third communication protocol is R16 NR-V.
  • the second communication protocol is R18 NR-V
  • the third communication protocol is R17 NR-V.
  • the third communication protocol is the same as the second communication protocol.
  • the first set of resources is a set of resources configured to transmit control information of the second communication protocol.
  • the resource pool of R18 NR-V includes two types of resources, one is time-frequency resources dedicated to R18 NR-V, and the other is time-frequency resources shared by R18 NR-V and LTE-V.
  • the second terminal can use the remaining resources in the resources dedicated to R18 NR-V to transmit the control information corresponding to the data, where the remaining resources are Among the resources dedicated to R18 NR-V, resources that are configured to transmit control information but are not occupied.
  • resource set 1 is the time-frequency resource commonly used by R18 NR-V and LTE-V
  • resource set 2 is the time-frequency resource used by R18 NR-V
  • resource set 2 includes a control resource set
  • resource set 1 The control information corresponding to the data in the resource set 2 can be transmitted on the remaining resources in the control resource set in the resource set 2.
  • control resources included in the control resource set or in other words, the control resources can be used to transmit control information, or in other words, the control resource set is a resource set composed of resources that can be used to transmit control information.
  • the first terminal may transmit the control information of the second communication protocol by using a control resource in the control resource set that is different from a resource configured to transmit control information of the third communication protocol.
  • the first terminal uses the time-frequency resources commonly used by the first communication protocol to transmit data of the second communication protocol, and uses resources configured to transmit control information of the third communication protocol Different control resources are used to transmit the control information of the second communication protocol, which helps to avoid resource conflict between the transmission of the first communication protocol and the transmission of the second communication protocol.
  • the third resource is frequency-division multiplexed and/or code-division multiplexed with resources in the first resource set.
  • the above-mentioned set of control resources is the set of control resources of the third communication protocol, that is, the set of control resources above is the first set of resources.
  • the set of control resources of the second communication protocol and the set of control resources of the third communication protocol may be frequency-division multiplexed or code-division multiplexed, or both frequency-division multiplexed and code-division multiplexed may be supported.
  • the first terminal since the first terminal transmits the control information of the second communication protocol by utilizing the resources in the set of control resources of the third communication protocol that are different from the resources configured to transmit the control information of the third communication protocol, the frequency spectrum can be improved. utilization efficiency.
  • the above-mentioned set of control resources includes a first set of resources and a second set of resources, wherein the first set of resources is a set of control resources of the third communication protocol, and the second set of resources is a set of control resources of the second communication protocol.
  • the third resource belongs to the second resource set.
  • the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set are frequency division multiplexed. In other words, there is no intersection between the second resource set and the first resource set in the frequency domain.
  • the first resource set includes PRB0, PRB1, and PRB2, and the second resource set includes PRB5, PRB6, and PRB7.
  • the foregoing control resource set includes a first resource set and a second resource set.
  • the first resource set is a control resource set of the third communication protocol
  • the second resource set is a control resource set of the second communication protocol.
  • the third resource belongs to the second resource set.
  • the resources in the second resource set are frequency-division multiplexed with the resources in the first resource set, or the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set have the same frequency domain and different code domains.
  • the first resource set includes PRB0, PRB1, and PRB2, and the second resource set includes PRB2, PRB3, and PRB4.
  • PRB2 can be used to transmit the control information of the second communication protocol and the control information of the third communication protocol.
  • PRB2 of the second communication protocol and PRB2 of the third communication protocol can be code division multiplexed .
  • the PRB0 and PRB1 in the second resource set are frequency division multiplexed with the resources in the second resource set.
  • the method further includes: the first terminal receives data on the fourth resource; the first terminal determines from the set of control resources
  • the third resource includes: the first terminal determines the time-domain resource of the third resource according to the fourth resource and the first mapping relationship; wherein the first mapping relationship includes the first physical time slot and the first mapping relationship
  • the mapping relationship of the second physical time slot, the first physical time slot is the last physical time slot included in the fourth resource (that is, the physical time slot where the end position of the fourth resource is located), and the second physical time slot
  • the second physical time slot is after the first physical time slot and is the first physical time slot containing control resources that meets the first time interval with the first physical time slot.
  • a unit of the first time interval may be a physical time slot.
  • the fourth resource belongs to a set of time-frequency resources commonly used with transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the physical time slot is used here because the mapping relationship between the physical sidelink shared channel (physical sidelink share channel, PSSCH) and PSFCH of the third communication protocol is determined according to the logical time slot in the resource pool of the third communication protocol, while the second communication protocol
  • the resource pool also has its own logical time slot index, which will cause the logical time slot index of the resource pool of the second communication protocol and the logical time slot index of the resource pool of the third communication protocol cannot be directly related to each other.
  • both the resource pool of the second communication protocol and the resource pool of the third communication protocol have a mapping relationship with the physical time slot, so the PSSCH resource in the resource pool of the second communication protocol can be determined to the resource of the third communication protocol according to the physical time slot Mapping relationship of PSFCH resources in the pool.
  • the first time interval is preconfigured, predefined, or configured by the base station.
  • the value range of the first time interval may be 2 or 3.
  • the method further includes: the first terminal receives data on the fourth resource; the first terminal determines from the set of control resources
  • the third resource includes: the first terminal determines the frequency domain resource of the third resource according to the fourth resource and the second mapping relationship; wherein the second mapping relationship includes the frequency domain resource of the fourth resource A mapping relationship between the frequency domain resource and the frequency domain resource of the third resource.
  • the third resource is frequency division multiplexed with resources in the first resource set.
  • the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set are frequency division multiplexed.
  • some of the resources in the second resource set are the same as some of the resources in the first resource set are different, and the third resource is a resource frequency division multiplexed with the resources in the first resource set.
  • the first terminal determining the third resource from the control resource set includes: the first terminal determining the code of the third resource according to the first cyclic shift (cyclic shift, CS) pair table Domain resources, wherein the first CS pair table is a CS pair table of the third communication protocol.
  • the third resource is frequency-division multiplexed with the resource configured to transmit the control information of the third communication protocol, so the transmission of the second communication protocol and the transmission of the third communication protocol will not have the problem of sending and receiving conflicts,
  • the transmission of the second communication protocol can support HARQ feedback to improve the reliability of data transmission, and at the same time, it will not affect the reliability of the HARQ transmission of the third communication protocol and its corresponding data transmission. Because at this time the second pass has been distinguished from the frequency domain Therefore, the CS pair table of the second communication protocol can be multiplexed with the CS pair table of the third communication protocol.
  • the first terminal determining the third resource from the control resource set includes: determining, by the first terminal, according to the second CS pair table A code domain resource of the third resource; wherein, the second CS pair table is different from the first CS pair table of the third communication protocol.
  • the first terminal may use a CS table different from the CS pair table of the third communication protocol to determine the code domain resource of the third resource, thereby realizing code division multiplexing of the third resource and the control resource of the third communication protocol.
  • This helps to avoid resource conflicts between the transmission of the control information of the second communication protocol and the transmission of the control information of the third communication protocol, thereby helping to improve transmission reliability.
  • the third resource may be frequency-division multiplexed with the resources configured to transmit the control information of the third communication protocol, or may not be frequency-division multiplexed.
  • the first terminal determining a third resource from a set of control resources includes: when the first terminal determines that the third resource is the same as the When the resources in the first resource set are frequency division multiplexed, the first terminal determines the code domain resource of the third resource according to the first CS pair table; when the first terminal determines that the third resource is the same as the first CS When resources in a resource set are code-division multiplexed, the first terminal determines the code domain resource of the third resource according to the second CS pair table; wherein, the second CS pair table and the third communication The protocol's first CS pairs form differently.
  • some of the resources of the second resource set of the second communication protocol and the resources of the first resource set of the third communication protocol are frequency division multiplexed, and some are not frequency division multiplexed but code division multiplexed.
  • the first terminal can flexibly select the CS pair table according to the frequency domain resource of the second resource, thereby realizing the frequency division multiplexing of the third resource and the resource configured to transmit the control information of the third communication protocol Or code division multiplexing, which helps to avoid resource conflicts between the transmission of the control information of the second communication protocol and the transmission of the control information of the third communication protocol, thereby affecting transmission reliability.
  • the maximum number of CS logarithms of the second communication protocol is W.
  • W may be RRC configured (the network device is configured using RRC parameters), or predefined, or preconfigured. Exemplarily, W is 6 or 3.
  • the CS pair of the second communication protocol includes at least one of the following situations:
  • the number of CS pairs is 1: the third communication protocol uses the first CS pair, and the first CS pair indicates a value of 1 and a value of 2 (the value of 2 is the CS value paired with the value of 1).
  • the second communication protocol uses a second CS pair, and the second CS pair indicates a value of 3 and a value of 4 (value 4 is a paired CS value with value 3).
  • the value 1 is different from the value 3.
  • the CS pair is (A, B), where the index of the CS pair may only indicate A, and B is the CS value paired with A.
  • the value 1 is 0, and the value 3 can be any one of 2, 3, 4, and 5.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), the value 1 is 0, and the value 2 is 6; the second CS pair is (3, 9), that is, the value 3 is 3, and the value 4 is 9.
  • the orthogonality between the first CS pair and the second CS pair is the best, and the interference between the transmission of the second communication protocol and the transmission of the third communication protocol is small.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), and the second CS pair is (2, 8).
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), and the first CS pair is (4, 10).
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), and the first CS pair is (5, 11).
  • the number of CS pairs is 2: the third communication protocol uses the first CS pair, and the first CS pair indicates a value of 5 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 6), and a value of 7 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 6). value 8).
  • the second communication protocol uses the second CS pair, and the second CS pair indicates a value of 9 (for The corresponding paired CS is the value 10), and the value is 11 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 12). Wherein, the values 5 and 7 are different from the values 9 and 11.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), (3, 9), and the second CS pair is any of (1, 7), (2, 8), (4, 10), (5, 11) two.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), (3, 9), the second CS pair is (1, 7), (2, 8), or, the first CS pair is (0, 6) , (3,9), the second CS pair is (2,8), (4,10), or the first CS pair is (0,6), (3,9), the second CS pair is (4, 10), (5, 11), or the first CS pair is (0, 6), (3, 9), the second CS pair is (2, 8), (5, 11), or the first CS pair is (0,6), (3,9), the second CS pair is (1,7), (5,11), or the first CS pair is (0,6), (3,9), the second CS pair is The pair is (1, 7), (4, 10). At this time, there is still a certain degree of orthogonality between the first CS pair and the second CS pair, and
  • the number of CS pairs is 3: the third communication protocol uses the first CS pair, and the first CS pair indicates a value of 12 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 13), and a value of 14 (the corresponding paired CS is the value The value is 15), and the value is 16 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 17).
  • the second communication protocol uses the second CS pair, and the second CS pair indicates a value of 17 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 18), a value of 19 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 20), and a value of 21 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 20).
  • the paired CS of is the value 22). Among them, the value 12, the value 14 and the value 16 are different from the value 17, the value 19 and the value 21.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), (2, 8), (4, 10); the second CS pair is (1, 7), (3, 9), (5, 11).
  • the interference between the transmission of the second communication protocol and the transmission of the third communication protocol is reduced as much as possible.
  • the CS pair may be configured by RRC, or predefined or preconfigured.
  • the CS pair corresponding to the first CS pair in the second CS pair table is the same as the first CS pair in the first CS pair table.
  • CS pairs correspond to different CS pairs.
  • the second CS pair table includes at least one entry in the following table, for example, the second CS pair table includes at least one row in the following table :
  • the second resource set in the control resource set is independently configured from the first resource set, and the resources in the second resource set Used to transmit control information of the second communication protocol, the third resource belongs to the second resource set.
  • the resources for transmitting control information using the second communication protocol and the resources for transmitting control information using the third communication protocol are distinguished by frequency division multiplexing or code division multiplexing, so that the control information of the second communication protocol can be guaranteed Transmission, to ensure the normal operation of its HARQ mechanism, thereby improving the reliability of data transmission.
  • frequency division multiplexing or code division multiplexing the resources used to transmit control information in the system can be utilized to the greatest extent, which helps to improve the utilization efficiency of spectrum.
  • control information includes at least one of the following: HARQ information, CSI feedback information, or resource conflict indication information.
  • the second set of resources is a set of HARQ resources used to transmit the second communication protocol.
  • the first set of resources is a set of resources used to transmit HARQ of the third communication protocol.
  • the second set of resources may be the first set of resources.
  • the configuration signaling of the second set of resources is the signaling of configuring the first set of resources.
  • the second resource set may be different from the first resource set.
  • the second resource set is configured using signaling.
  • the configuration parameters of the second resource set are different from the configuration parameters of the first resource set.
  • the second set of resources is a set of HARQ resources used to transmit the second communication protocol.
  • the first set of resources is a set of resources used to transmit HARQ of the third communication protocol.
  • the third resource set is a set of resources used to transmit resource conflict indication information of the third communication protocol.
  • the second set of resources may be the first set of resources.
  • the configuration signaling of the second set of resources is the signaling of configuring the first set of resources.
  • the second resource set may be a third resource set.
  • the configuration signaling of the second resource set is the signaling for configuring the third resource set.
  • the second resource set may be different from the first resource set and the third resource set.
  • the second resource set is configured using signaling.
  • the configuration parameters of the second resource set are different from the configuration parameters of the first resource set and the third resource set.
  • a method for receiving control information is provided.
  • the method may be executed by the second terminal, or may be executed by a module or unit applied to the second terminal.
  • the second terminal For the convenience of description, it is collectively referred to as the second terminal hereinafter.
  • the method includes: the second terminal determines a third resource from a set of control resources; the second terminal uses a second communication protocol to receive control information on the third resource; wherein, the first resource in the set of control resources
  • the resource set is configured to transmit control information of a third communication protocol, and the third resource is different from the resources in the first resource set.
  • the second communication protocol is R18 NR-V
  • the third communication protocol is R16 NR-V.
  • the second communication protocol is R18 NR-V
  • the third communication protocol is R17 NR-V.
  • the third communication protocol is the same as the second communication protocol.
  • the first set of resources is a set of resources configured to transmit control information of the second communication protocol.
  • the resource pool of R18 NR-V includes two types of resources, one is time-frequency resources dedicated to R18 NR-V, and the other is time-frequency resources shared by R18 NR-V and LTE-V.
  • the second terminal can use the remaining resources in the resources dedicated to R18 NR-V to transmit the control information corresponding to the data, where the remaining resources are Among the resources dedicated to R18 NR-V, resources that are configured to transmit control information but are not occupied.
  • capital Source set 1 is the time-frequency resource commonly used by R18 NR-V and LTE-V
  • resource set 2 is the time-frequency resource used by R18 NR-V
  • resource set 2 includes the control resource set
  • the data in resource set 1 corresponds to The control information of can be transmitted on the remaining resources in the control resource set in resource set 2.
  • control resources included in the control resource set or in other words, the control resources can be used to transmit control information, or in other words, the control resource set is a resource set composed of resources that can be used to transmit control information.
  • the second terminal may transmit the control information of the second communication protocol by using a control resource in the control resource set that is different from a resource configured to transmit control information of the third communication protocol.
  • the second terminal uses the time-frequency resources commonly used with the first communication protocol to transmit data of the second communication protocol, and uses resources configured to transmit control information of the third communication protocol Different control resources are used to transmit the control information of the second communication protocol, which helps to avoid resource conflict between the transmission of the first communication protocol and the transmission of the second communication protocol.
  • the third resource is frequency-division multiplexed and/or code-division multiplexed with resources in the first resource set.
  • the above-mentioned set of control resources is the set of control resources of the third communication protocol, that is, the set of control resources above is the first set of resources.
  • the set of control resources of the second communication protocol and the set of control resources of the third communication protocol may be frequency-division multiplexed or code-division multiplexed, or both frequency-division multiplexed and code-division multiplexed may be supported.
  • the first terminal since the first terminal transmits the control information of the second communication protocol by utilizing the resources in the set of control resources of the third communication protocol that are different from the resources configured to transmit the control information of the third communication protocol, the frequency spectrum can be improved. utilization efficiency.
  • the above-mentioned set of control resources includes a first set of resources and a second set of resources, wherein the first set of resources is a set of control resources of the third communication protocol, and the second set of resources is a set of control resources of the second communication protocol.
  • the third resource belongs to the second resource set.
  • the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set are frequency division multiplexed. In other words, there is no intersection between the second resource set and the first resource set in the frequency domain.
  • the first resource set includes PRB0, PRB1, and PRB2, and the second resource set includes PRB5, PRB6, and PRB7.
  • the foregoing control resource set includes a first resource set and a second resource set.
  • the first resource set is a control resource set of the third communication protocol
  • the second resource set is a control resource set of the second communication protocol.
  • the third resource belongs to the second resource set.
  • the resources in the second resource set are frequency-division multiplexed with the resources in the first resource set, or the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set have the same frequency domain and different code domains.
  • the first resource set includes PRB0, PRB1, and PRB2, and the second resource set includes PRB2, PRB3, and PRB4.
  • PRB2 can be used to transmit the control information of the second communication protocol and the control information of the third communication protocol.
  • PRB2 of the second communication protocol and PRB2 of the third communication protocol can be code division multiplexed .
  • the PRB0 and PRB1 in the second resource set are frequency division multiplexed with the resources in the second resource set.
  • the method further includes: the second terminal sends data on the fourth resource; the second terminal determines from the set of control resources
  • the third resource includes: the second terminal determines the time-domain resource of the third resource according to the fourth resource and the first mapping relationship; wherein the first mapping relationship includes the first physical time slot and the first mapping relationship
  • the mapping relationship of the second physical time slot, the first physical time slot is the last physical time slot included in the fourth resource (that is, the physical time slot where the end position of the fourth resource is located), and the second physical time slot is the first physical time containing control resources that meets the first time interval with the first physical time slot slot, the second physical time slot is after the first physical time slot.
  • a unit of the first time interval may be a physical time slot.
  • the fourth resource belongs to a set of time-frequency resources commonly used with transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the physical time slot is used here because the mapping relationship from PSSCH to PSFCH of the third communication protocol is determined according to the logical time slot in the resource pool of the third communication protocol, and the resource pool of the second communication protocol also has its own logical time slot index, which means As a result, the index of the logical time slot of the resource pool of the second communication protocol and the index of the logical time slot of the resource pool of the third communication protocol cannot be directly correlated with each other.
  • both the resource pool of the second communication protocol and the resource pool of the third communication protocol have a mapping relationship with the physical time slot, so the PSSCH resource in the resource pool of the second communication protocol can be determined to the resource of the third communication protocol according to the physical time slot Mapping relationship of PSFCH resources in the pool.
  • the first time interval is preconfigured, predefined, or configured by the base station.
  • the value range of the first time interval may be 2 or 3.
  • the method further includes: the second terminal sends data on the fourth resource; the second terminal determines from the set of control resources
  • the third resource includes: the second terminal determines the frequency domain resource of the third resource according to the fourth resource and the second mapping relationship; wherein the second mapping relationship includes the frequency domain resource of the fourth resource A mapping relationship between the frequency domain resource and the frequency domain resource of the third resource.
  • the third resource is frequency division multiplexed with resources in the first resource set.
  • the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set are frequency division multiplexed.
  • some of the resources in the second resource set are the same as some of the resources in the first resource set are different, and the third resource is a resource frequency division multiplexed with the resources in the first resource set.
  • the second terminal determining the third resource from the control resource set includes: the second terminal determining the code domain resource of the third resource according to the first CS pair table, where the first A CS pair table is the CS pair table of the third communication protocol.
  • the third resource is frequency-division multiplexed with the resource configured to transmit the control information of the third communication protocol, so the transmission of the second communication protocol and the transmission of the third communication protocol will not have the problem of sending and receiving conflicts,
  • the transmission of the second communication protocol can support HARQ feedback to improve the reliability of data transmission, and at the same time, it will not affect the reliability of the HARQ transmission of the third communication protocol and its corresponding data transmission. Since resources for the transmission of the second communication protocol and the transmission of the third communication protocol have been distinguished from the frequency domain at this time, the CS pair table of the second communication protocol may be multiplexed with the CS pair table of the third communication protocol.
  • the second terminal determining the third resource from the control resource set includes: the second terminal determining, according to the second CS pair table, A code domain resource of the third resource; wherein, the second CS pair table is different from the first CS pair table of the third communication protocol.
  • the second terminal can use a CS table different from the CS pair table of the third communication protocol to determine the code domain resource of the third resource, thereby realizing code division multiplexing of the third resource and the control resource of the third communication protocol.
  • This helps to avoid resource conflicts between the transmission of the control information of the second communication protocol and the transmission of the control information of the third communication protocol, thereby helping to improve transmission reliability.
  • the third resource may be frequency-division multiplexed with the resources configured to transmit the control information of the third communication protocol, or may not be frequency-division multiplexed.
  • the second terminal determining a third resource from a set of control resources includes: when the second terminal determines that the third resource is the same as the in the first resource collection When resources are frequency division multiplexed, the second terminal determines the code domain resource of the third resource according to the first CS pair table; when the second terminal determines that the third resource and the resources in the first resource set In code division multiplexing, the second terminal determines the code domain resource of the third resource according to the second CS pair table; wherein, the second CS pair table and the first CS pair of the third communication protocol The forms are different.
  • some of the resources of the second resource set of the second communication protocol and the resources of the first resource set of the third communication protocol are frequency division multiplexed, and some are not frequency division multiplexed but code division multiplexed.
  • the second terminal can flexibly select the CS pair table according to the frequency domain resource of the second resource, thereby realizing the frequency division multiplexing of the third resource and the resource configured to transmit the control information of the third communication protocol Or code division multiplexing, which helps to avoid resource conflicts between the transmission of the control information of the second communication protocol and the transmission of the control information of the third communication protocol, thereby affecting transmission reliability.
  • the maximum number of CS logarithms of the second communication protocol is W.
  • W may be RRC configured (the network device is configured using RRC parameters), or predefined, or preconfigured. Exemplarily, W is 6 or 3.
  • the CS pair of the second communication protocol includes at least one of the following situations:
  • the number of CS pairs is 1: the third communication protocol uses the first CS pair, and the first CS pair indicates a value of 1 and a value of 2 (the value of 2 is the CS value paired with the value of 1).
  • the second communication protocol uses a second CS pair, and the second CS pair indicates a value of 3 and a value of 4 (value 4 is a paired CS value with value 3).
  • the value 1 is different from the value 3.
  • the CS pair is (A, B), where the index of the CS pair may only indicate A, and B is the CS value paired with A.
  • the value 1 is 0, and the value 3 can be any one of 2, 3, 4, and 5.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), the value 1 is 0, and the value 2 is 6; the second CS pair is (3, 9), that is, the value 3 is 3, and the value 4 is 9.
  • the orthogonality between the first CS pair and the second CS pair is the best, and the interference between the transmission of the second communication protocol and the transmission of the third communication protocol is small.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), and the second CS pair is (2, 8).
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), and the first CS pair is (4, 10).
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), and the first CS pair is (5, 11).
  • the number of CS pairs is 2: the third communication protocol uses the first CS pair, and the first CS pair indicates a value of 5 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 6), and a value of 7 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 6). value 8).
  • the second communication protocol uses a second CS pair, and the second CS pair indicates a value of 9 (the corresponding paired CS is a value of 10), and a value of 11 (the corresponding paired CS is a value of 12). Wherein, the values 5 and 7 are different from the values 9 and 11.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), (3, 9), and the second CS pair is any of (1, 7), (2, 8), (4, 10), (5, 11) two.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), (3, 9), the second CS pair is (1, 7), (2, 8), or, the first CS pair is (0, 6) , (3,9), the second CS pair is (2,8), (4,10), or the first CS pair is (0,6), (3,9), the second CS pair is (4, 10), (5, 11), or the first CS pair is (0, 6), (3, 9), the second CS pair is (2, 8), (5, 11), or the first CS pair is (0,6), (3,9), the second CS pair is (1,7), (5,11), or the first CS pair is (0,6), (3,9), the second CS pair is The pair is (1, 7), (4, 10). At this time, there is still a certain degree of orthogonality between the first CS pair and the second CS pair, and
  • the number of CS pairs is 3: the third communication protocol uses the first CS pair, and the first CS pair indicates a value of 12 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 13), and a value of 14 (the corresponding paired CS is the value The value is 15), and the value is 16 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 17).
  • the second communication protocol uses the second CS pair, and the second CS pair indicates a value of 17 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 18), a value of 19 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 20), and a value of 21 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 20).
  • the paired CS of is the value 22). Among them, the value 12, the value 14 and the value 16 are different from the value 17, the value 19 and the value 21.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), (2, 8), (4, 10); the second CS pair is (1, 7), (3, 9), (5, 11).
  • the interference between the transmission of the second communication protocol and the transmission of the third communication protocol is reduced as much as possible.
  • the CS pair may be configured by RRC, or predefined or preconfigured.
  • the CS pair corresponding to the first CS pair in the second CS pair table is the same as the first CS pair in the first CS pair table.
  • CS pairs correspond to different CS pairs.
  • the second CS pair table includes at least one entry in the following table, for example, the second CS pair table includes at least one row in the following table :
  • the second resource set and the first resource set are configured independently, and the resources in the second resource set are used to transmit the second Control information of a communication protocol, the third resource belongs to the second resource set.
  • the resources for transmitting control information using the second communication protocol and the resources for transmitting control information using the third communication protocol are distinguished by frequency division multiplexing or code division multiplexing, so that the control information of the second communication protocol can be guaranteed Transmission, to ensure the normal operation of its HARQ mechanism, thereby improving the reliability of data transmission.
  • frequency division multiplexing or code division multiplexing the resources used to transmit control information in the system can be utilized to the greatest extent, which helps to improve the utilization efficiency of spectrum.
  • control information includes At least one of the following items: HARQ information, CSI feedback information, or resource conflict indication information.
  • the second set of resources is a set of HARQ resources used to transmit the second communication protocol.
  • the first set of resources is a set of resources used to transmit HARQ of the third communication protocol.
  • the second set of resources may be the first set of resources.
  • the configuration signaling of the second set of resources is the signaling of configuring the first set of resources.
  • the second resource set may be different from the first resource set.
  • the second resource set is configured using signaling.
  • the configuration parameters of the second resource set are different from the configuration parameters of the first resource set.
  • the second set of resources is a set of HARQ resources used to transmit the second communication protocol.
  • the first set of resources is a set of resources used to transmit HARQ of the third communication protocol.
  • the third resource set is a set of resources used to transmit resource conflict indication information of the third communication protocol.
  • the second set of resources may be the first set of resources.
  • the configuration signaling of the second set of resources is the signaling of configuring the first set of resources.
  • the second resource set may be a third resource set.
  • the configuration signaling of the second resource set is the signaling for configuring the third resource set.
  • the second resource set may be different from the first resource set and the third resource set.
  • the second resource set is configured using signaling.
  • the configuration parameters of the second resource set are different from the configuration parameters of the first resource set and the third resource set.
  • a communication device is provided, and the device is configured to execute the method provided in any one of the above aspects or its implementation manners.
  • the apparatus may include a unit and/or module, such as a processing unit and/or a communication unit, for performing the method provided by any of the above aspects or its implementation manner.
  • the apparatus is a first terminal or a second terminal.
  • the communication unit may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface;
  • the processing unit may be at least one processor.
  • the transceiver is a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface is an input/output circuit.
  • the apparatus is a chip, a chip system, or a circuit applied to the first terminal or the second terminal.
  • the communication unit may be an input/output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, Pins or related circuits, etc.
  • the processing unit may be at least one processor, processing circuit, or logic circuit, etc.
  • a communication device which includes: a memory for storing programs; at least one processor for executing the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, so as to perform the functions provided by any of the above aspects or its implementations. method.
  • the apparatus is a first terminal or a second terminal.
  • the apparatus is a chip, a chip system, or a circuit applied to the first terminal or the second terminal.
  • a processor configured to execute the methods provided in the foregoing aspects.
  • the processor's output and reception, input and other operations can also be understood as the sending and receiving operations performed by the radio frequency circuit and the antenna, which is not limited in this application.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores program code for device execution, where the program code includes a method for executing any one of the above aspects or its implementation.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, and when the computer program product is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the method provided by any one of the above aspects or its implementation.
  • a chip in the eleventh aspect, includes a processor and a communication interface, and the processor reads the The instructions stored in the memory are fetched, and the method provided by any one of the above aspects or its implementation is executed.
  • the chip further includes a memory, in which computer programs or instructions are stored, and the processor is used to execute the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, the processor is used to execute The method provided by any one of the above aspects or its implementation.
  • a communication system including the above-mentioned first terminal and/or second terminal.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of a V2X system to which the technical solution of the present application can be applied.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of PSFCH resources.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a time slot structure of NR-V2X.
  • Fig. 4 is an example (1) of the mapping relationship between PSSCH resources and PSFCH resources.
  • Fig. 5 is an example (2) of the mapping relationship between PSSCH resources and PSFCH resources.
  • Fig. 6 is an example of a single candidate resource determination manner.
  • Fig. 7 is an example of physical time slots and logical time slots.
  • Fig. 8 is a sequence diagram of resource selection.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of the internal module structure of the R18 NR-V terminal.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a method 1000 for sending control information provided by this application.
  • Fig. 11 is an example of reserved resources indicated by SCI.
  • Fig. 12 is an example of the time slot where the first resource is located.
  • Figure 13 is an example of a single PSFCH candidate resource.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a data sending method 1300 provided by this application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a method 1400 for receiving control information provided by this application.
  • Fig. 16 is an example of frequency spectrum sharing by the first resource pool and the second resource pool in a time-division multiplexing manner.
  • Fig. 17 is an example of the mapping relationship between PSSCH resources and PSFCH resources.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of a method 1700 for sending control information provided by this application.
  • Fig. 19 is an example of the mapping relationship between PSSCH resources and PSFCH resources.
  • FIG. 20 is an example of frequency domain resources and code domain resources corresponding to a subchannel.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a method 2000 for receiving control information provided by this application.
  • Fig. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 23 is another schematic structural diagram of the device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • MTC machine type communication
  • M2M machine-to-machine communication
  • the terminal of the present application may be a device including a wireless transceiver function and capable of providing communication services for users.
  • the terminal may be a device in the V2X system, a device in the D2D system, a device in the MTC system, and the like.
  • a terminal may refer to an industrial robot, an industrial automation device, a user equipment (user equipment, UE), an access terminal, a user unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, wireless terminal, mobile terminal, customer premise equipment (CPE), vehicle-mounted terminal, user agent, user device, virtual Terminals in reality, terminals in augmented reality, terminals in telemedicine, terminals in smart grid, terminals in smart furniture, terminals in smart office, terminals in smart wearables, terminals in smart transportation, or smart cities in the terminal etc.
  • CPE customer premise equipment
  • a terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a Handheld devices with communication functions, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, terminals in the fifth generation (5 th generation, 5G) network or networks after 5G, or future evolved communication networks in the terminal etc.
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of a V2X system to which the technical solution of the present application can be applied.
  • the system can include multiple vehicles and networks, etc.
  • vehicle to vehicle vehicle to vehicle
  • vehicle to pedestrian vehicle to pedestrian
  • V2N vehicle to network
  • Vehicles can use infrastructure or network configured communication resource pools for inter-device communication.
  • the connection between the vehicle and the access network equipment is an uplink and downlink, and the connection between vehicles is a sidelink.
  • FIG. 1 is only a schematic diagram and does not constitute any limitation to the protection scope of the present application.
  • the number of vehicles shown in FIG. 1 is just an example.
  • HARQ hybrid automatic repeat request
  • FEC forward error correction
  • ARQ automatic repeat request
  • the receiving end will feed back a negative acknowledgment (NACK) signal to the sending end, and the sending end will further transmit a part of information bits and/or redundant bits (referred to as heavy bits) after receiving the NACK signal.
  • NACK negative acknowledgment
  • the receiving end merges with the previously received data and decodes it. If the retransmitted data still cannot be decoded correctly, it can retransmit it again. As the number of retransmissions increases, information bits and/or redundant bits are continuously accumulated, and the channel coding rate is continuously reduced, so that the decoding effect can be continuously improved.
  • LTE V2X supports broadcasting, that is, the sending terminal sends data without any restrictions on the receiving terminal.
  • unicast and multicast are introduced in NR V2X.
  • Unicast means communication between a pair of terminals
  • multicast means sending data sent by a terminal According to the data, a limited number of terminals in the group receive it.
  • HARQ feedback is supported in unicast and multicast.
  • Unicast and multicast support ACK/NACK feedback mode, that is, the receiving terminal will feed back ACK if it successfully receives data, and feedback NACK if it fails to receive data.
  • multicast also supports the NACK only feedback method, that is, multiple receiving terminals only feed back NACK on the same control resource, that is, the receiving terminal will feedback NACK if it fails to receive data successfully, and will not send any feedback signal if it successfully receives data.
  • the HARQ information of unicast and multicast is carried by a feedback channel, and the feedback channel is a physical sidelink feedback channel (physical sidelink feedback channel, PSFCH).
  • PSFCH physical sidelink feedback channel
  • a resource pool is a collection of time-frequency resources.
  • the resource pool is a collection of time-frequency resources used by the terminal in the sidelink to transmit the PSSCH or receive a physical sidelink shared channel (physical sidelink share channel, PSSCH).
  • a terminal can be configured with one or more resource pools.
  • the resource pool can also be replaced by a time-frequency resource set, which is collectively referred to as a resource pool hereinafter for the convenience of description.
  • PSFCH resources are periodically configured on the resource pool.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of PSFCH resources.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a time slot structure of NR-V2X.
  • NCP normal cyclic prefix
  • the time slot structure that does not contain PSFCH resources is shown in Figure 3 (a), and the first symbol of each time slot (symbol 0 in Figure 3 (a)) is used for automatic gain control (automatic gain control, AGC).
  • AGC automatic gain control
  • the number of symbols used to carry the PSCCH in each time slot is configured on each resource pool, which can be 2 to 3 symbols (symbols 1 and 2 in (a) of Figure 3), and the PSCCH carries the first Level 1 sidelink control information (SCI).
  • SCI Level 1 sidelink control information
  • the last symbol of each slot is the guard period (GP).
  • the remaining symbols in the slot can be used to transmit data and second level SCI.
  • the time slot structure including PSFCH resources is shown in Figure 3(b), and Figure 3(b) takes the 12th and 13th symbols of the time slot for carrying PSFCH as an example.
  • the first symbol of each time slot (such as the symbol 0 in (b) of Figure 3) is used for AGC.
  • the number of symbols used to carry the PSCCH in each time slot is configured on each resource pool, which can be 2 to 3 symbols (symbols 1 and 2 in (a) of Figure 3), and the PSCCH carries the first Level 1 SCI.
  • the last symbol and the 11th symbol of each time slot (such as symbols 10 and 13 in (b) of FIG. 3 ) are GPs.
  • the remaining symbols in the slot can be used to transmit data and second level SCI.
  • Timing of HARQ feedback that is, determination of time-domain resources of PSFCH resources.
  • the timing of HARQ feedback is the time interval between PSSCH and PSFCH. Assuming that a PSSCH transmission ends at time slot n, the corresponding time slot for HARQ feedback is the first time slot with PSFCH resources including n+k time slot and after n+k time slot.
  • k represents the processing capability of the terminal, for example, k may be 2 or 3, and so on.
  • frequency domain resources and code domain resources of PSFCH are determined using implicit association rules.
  • the terminal will be provided with a PRB set in the resource pool, and the number of PRBs in the PRB set is The terminal performs PSFCH transmission on one PRB in the PRB set.
  • the number of subchannels in the resource pool is denoted as N subch
  • the number of PSSCH time slots associated with PSFCH time slots is The terminal for time slot i and subchannel j starts from allocated in PRBs PRBs. in, 0 ⁇ j ⁇ N subch , and this allocation starts from the ascending order of i, and continues to use the ascending order of j to traverse after the traversal of i ends. terminal expect yes multiples of .
  • the terminal according to the formula Determine the number of resources available for PSFCH transmission. in, is the logarithm of the cyclic shift (CS) of the resource pool. but PRBs are associated with the starting subchannel of the corresponding PSSCH, but one PRB corresponding to PSSCH or associated with sub-channels. or It is configured on the resource pool.
  • CS cyclic shift
  • PSFCH resources are first placed in the PRB index according to the Sort in ascending order in PRB, and then from The CS pairs are sorted in ascending order according to the index of the CS pair.
  • P ID is a physical layer source identifier (identity, ID) provided in the second-level SCI, and when M ID is 0 or an identifier indicated by a higher layer of a terminal receiving the PSSCH.
  • Figure 4 and Figure 5 are an example of the mapping relationship between PSSCH resources and PSFCH resources.
  • each subchannel may correspond to 2 resource blocks (physical resource blocks, PRBs). For example, subchannel (0, 0) corresponds to subchannel index 0 and time slot index 0.
  • the configuration of CS logarithm is 3 (ie ), the frequency domain resources and code domain resources corresponding to the subchannel (0, 0) are shown in Figure 5, that is, one subchannel corresponds to six resources that can be used to transmit HARQ information.
  • a single candidate resource R x, y is defined as being in the slot
  • the consecutive L subch sub-channels of , where the number of the sub-channel is x+j, where j 0, . . . , L subch -1.
  • any consecutive L subch subchannels included in the resource pool are a single candidate resource.
  • Fig. 6 is an example of a single candidate resource determination manner.
  • slot 1 includes four single candidate resources R 1,1 , R 2,1 , R 3,1 and R 4,1 .
  • Fig. 7 is an example of physical time slots and logical time slots.
  • Figure 7 takes LTE-V and R16 NR-V as an example to share spectrum through time division multiplexing (TDM).
  • LTE-V corresponds to physical time slots 1 2, 4, 5, 7, and 8
  • R16 NR-V corresponds to physical time slots 0, 3, 6, and 9.
  • LTE-V physical time slots 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, and 8 are equivalent to logical time slots 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of LTE-V, where 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are logical slot indexes.
  • R16 NR-V physical time slots 0, 3, 6, and 9 are equivalent to logical time slots 0, 1, 2, and 3 of R16 NR-V, where 0, 1, 2, and 3 are logical time slots index of.
  • Fig. 8 is a sequence diagram of resource selection.
  • time slot set of the resource pool is defined as
  • Step 1 the terminal determines the resource selection window [n+T 1 , n+T 2 ].
  • n is the moment when resource selection is triggered.
  • T 1 depends on the implementation of the terminal, but T 1 needs to meet: in, The value is related to the subcarrier spacing. For example, The value of can be determined according to Table 1. Table 1 shows the value of .
  • the value of T 2 is related to the minimum value of T 2 and the remaining packet delay budget (packet delay budget, PDB). For example, if the value of T 2min is smaller than PDB, the value of T 2 depends on the realization of the terminal, but T 2 needs to satisfy: T 2min ⁇ T 2 ⁇ PDB; if the value of T 2min is larger than PDB, then T The value of 2 is PDB, where T 2min is the minimum value of T 2 , and the PDB is in units of time slots.
  • the total number of individual candidate resources in the resource pool is recorded as M total .
  • Step 2 the terminal determines the resource awareness window
  • n is the moment when resource selection is triggered.
  • T 0 is the resource-aware window The number of corresponding time slots.
  • the value of is related to the subcarrier spacing.
  • the value of can be determined according to Table 2, which shows the value of .
  • Step 3 the terminal obtains the resource awareness window inner perception.
  • the sensing result may include at least one of the following: PSCCH decoding result and RSRP measurement result.
  • Step 4 the terminal determines resources for transmitting the PSSCH according to the sensing result.
  • the terminal excludes from SA a single candidate resource R x,y that simultaneously satisfies the following conditions.
  • Condition 1 An SCI is received, and the SCI includes a resource reservation period field and a priority field.
  • the terminal in the time slot An SCI is received, and the SCI includes a resource reservation period field, and a priority field.
  • the resource reservation period field indicates p rsvp_RX
  • the priority field indicates prio RX .
  • Condition 2 The measured RSRP value corresponding to the reserved resources indicated by the SCI is higher than the RSRP threshold A.
  • A is Th(p rsvp_RX , prio RX ).
  • Condition 3 A single candidate resource overlaps with the reserved resource indicated in the SCI.
  • T scal is obtained by converting T 2 into units of milliseconds (msec).
  • the terminal judges whether the number of single candidate resources in SA is greater than X ⁇ M total . If the number of single candidate resources in SA is less than X ⁇ M total , the terminal increases the RSRP threshold Th( pr s vp_RX , prio RX ) by 3dB, and performs the exclusion process again. If the number of individual candidate resources in the SA reaches X ⁇ M total , the exclusion process ends, and the current SA is a set of individual candidate resources that can be used to transmit the PSSCH.
  • Step 5 the terminal selects a single candidate resource for transmitting the PSSCH from the current SA .
  • the present application provides a technical solution for the terminal to consider the resources occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol when determining the available resources for transmitting the control information of the second communication protocol, which can avoid the resources occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the resource transmits the control information of the second communication protocol, thereby helping to avoid resource conflict between the transmission of the first communication protocol and the transmission of the second communication protocol.
  • the first communication protocol and the second communication protocol coexist in a co-channel. It can be understood that the first communication protocol and the second communication protocol use the same set of time-frequency resources. It can be understood that the first communication protocol and the second communication protocol share a resource pool. It can also be understood that the resource pool of the first communication protocol is exactly the same as the resource pool of the second communication protocol. It can also be understood that the time-frequency resource set in the resource pool of the first communication protocol is exactly the same as the time-frequency resource set in the resource pool of the second communication protocol, and the terminal of the second communication protocol specifies that the resource pool is a shared resource pool. It can also be understood that the resource pool of the second communication protocol includes time-frequency resources shared with the first communication protocol. Or, the resource pool of the second communication protocol overlaps with the resource pool of the first communication protocol in the time domain (or uses the same time domain resource). For convenience of description, the resource pool of the second communication protocol is referred to as the first resource pool below.
  • the present application does not limit specific protocol types of the first communication protocol, the second communication protocol, and the third communication protocol.
  • the first communication protocol is LTE-V
  • the second communication protocol is any version of NR-V (for example, R18 NR-V, R19 NR-V, R20 NR-V, etc.).
  • the first communication protocol is LTE-Sidelink
  • the second communication protocol is any version of NR-Sidelink (for example, R18 NR-Sidelink, R19 NR-Sidelink, R20 NR-Sidelink, etc.).
  • the second communication protocol is any version of NR-V or NR-Sidelink
  • the third communication protocol is R16 NR sidelink, R16 NR-V, R17 NR sidelink, R17 NR-V, etc.
  • the second communication protocol is the same as the third communication protocol, and is any version of NR-V or NR-Sidelink (for example, R18 NR-V, R19 NR-V, R20 NR-V, R18 NR-Sidelink , R19 NR-Sidelink, R20 NR-Sidelink, etc.).
  • NR-V and NR-Sidelink can replace each other
  • LTE-V and LTE-Sidelink can replace each other.
  • the technical solution of this application is described below with the first communication protocol being LTE-V, the second communication protocol being R18 NR-V, and the third communication protocol being R16 NR-V.
  • a terminal of a certain communication protocol may be understood as a terminal including a module of the communication protocol or a terminal supporting the communication protocol.
  • an R18 NR-V terminal can be understood as a terminal that includes an R18 NR-V module or a terminal that supports R18 NR-V functions.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of the internal module structure of the R18 NR-V terminal. As shown in Figure 9, the terminal includes an LTE-V module and an NR-V module, where the NR-V module includes an R18 NR-V module.
  • the terminal uses a communication protocol to send or receive signals, which can be understood as the terminal using the wireless access of the communication protocol to send or receive signals, or the terminal to receive or send signals through the communication protocol module, Or, the terminal uses the wireless communication technology corresponding to the communication protocol to receive or send the signal, or the terminal receives or sends the signal to meet the requirements of the communication protocol.
  • the resources used to transmit data may also be replaced by resources used to transmit PSSCH, PSSCH resources, or data resources, resources used to transmit PSCCH and PSSCH, and the like.
  • the resources used to transmit control information may also be replaced by resources used to transmit PSFCH, PSFCH resources, control resources, or feedback resources.
  • for indicating may include both for direct indicating and for indirect indicating, or “for indicating” or “indicating” may be explicitly and/or implicitly instruct.
  • an implicit indication may be based on the location and/or resources of the transmission; an explicit indication may be based on one or more parameters, and/or one or more indices, and/or one or more bit patterns it represents.
  • the first, second, third, fourth and various numbers are only for convenience of description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, distinguishing between different communication protocols, different collections of resources, etc.
  • predefinition can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in the device (for example, including the terminal).
  • This application does not limit its specific implementation.
  • "preserving” may refer to storing in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be provided independently, or may be integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device. A part of the one or more memories may also be set independently, and a part may be integrated in a decoder, processor, or communication device.
  • the type of the storage may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • the "protocol” involved in the embodiment of the present application may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol and related protocols applied in future communication systems, which is not limited in this application.
  • At least one means one or more, and “multiple” means two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the contextual objects are an “or” relationship.
  • At least one of the following” or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items.
  • At least one (one) of a, b and c may represent: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , b and c.
  • a, b and c can be single or multiple.
  • the terminal of R18 NR-V can dynamically share the first resource pool Select resources in the pool, and transmit data or control information on the selected resources. Since the first resource pool is a shared resource pool and the standardization of LTE-V has ended, the modification to LTE-V should be minimized or not modified in the process of designing the transmission mechanism of control information.
  • control information may include at least one of the following: HARQ information, CSI feedback information, or resource conflict indication information.
  • the HARQ information may be the ACK information fed back to the terminal sending the data when the terminal receiving the data successfully decodes the received data; NACK information fed back by the terminal sending data.
  • the HARQ information may be the ACK or NACK of the multicast feedback option 1, or the NACK only of the multicast feedback option 2 (only when the first terminal does not successfully decode the first data from the second terminal to the NACK information fed back by the second terminal), or unicast ACK or NACK.
  • R18 NR-V can have many processing methods.
  • the R18 NR-V can adopt the following method 1, method 2 or method 3.
  • R18 NR-V does not support the transmission of control information.
  • blind retransmission can be understood as repeated transmission of data, wherein the number of times of repeated transmission can be configured or preconfigured, and can also be dynamically indicated in the scheduling signaling.
  • R18 NR-V can also guarantee certain reliability through blind retransmission.
  • Pre-configure or configure the priority threshold Pre-configure or configure the priority threshold.
  • the configuration can be configured by the network device. If the R18 NR-V terminal transmits data with a priority lower than the threshold (the priority value is higher than the threshold), the R18 NR-V terminal Data is transmitted on a resource pool.
  • the R18 NR-V terminal transmits data on the time-frequency resource set dedicated to R18 NR-V transmission.
  • the set of time-frequency resources dedicated to R18 NR-V transmission can be understood as shared time-frequency resources.
  • LTE-V and NR-V use the same time-frequency resources, there may be conflicts between LTE-V transmissions and NR-V transmissions, so low-priority NR-V transmissions are transmitted on shared time-frequency resources, High-priority NR-V transmissions are transmitted on dedicated time-frequency resources, which can ensure the reliability of high-priority transmissions.
  • R18 NR-V supports the transmission of control information, and the description of mode 3 is detailed below.
  • manner 3 take the first terminal receiving data and sending control information, and the second terminal sending data and receiving control information as an example.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a method 1000 for sending control information provided by this application.
  • the method 1000 can be applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 above, but is not limited thereto.
  • the method 1000 may be executed by the first terminal, or may be executed by a module or unit applied to the first terminal. For convenience of description, it is collectively referred to as the first terminal hereinafter.
  • Method 1000 can include at least some of the following.
  • Step 1010 the first terminal acquires first information.
  • the first information is information related to LTE-V transmission, and is used to determine resources occupied by LTE-V transmission in the first resource pool.
  • the first resource pool is the resource pool of R18 NR-V.
  • the resources occupied by LTE-V transmission can also be replaced by reserved resources for LTE-V transmission, resources occupied by LTE-V, or reserved resources for LTE-V, or indicated by LTE-V transmission resources, etc.
  • the first information may include at least one of the following information: SCI, or a signal quality measurement value corresponding to the SCI.
  • the SCI includes the resource indication information of the LTE-V transmission and/or the resource reservation field of the LTE-V transmission.
  • the signal quality corresponding to the SCI may be represented by at least one of the following information: RSRP, RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the signal quality measurement value corresponding to the SCI may be the signal quality measurement value of the DMRS carried by the PSSCH scheduled by the SCI, or the signal quality measurement value of the DMRS carried by the PSCCH where the SCI is located, without limitation.
  • the signal quality corresponding to the SCI may be energy on at least one symbol or energy on one time slot.
  • the SCI can also be interpreted as SA, or replaced with PSCCH decoding information.
  • the first information includes PSCCH decoding information and RSRP measurement information in one time domain resource set.
  • the method for determining the location of the time domain resource set includes at least one of the following: pre-definition, pre-configuration, transmission from the LTE-V module of the first terminal to the NR-V module, or determination by the NR-V module and sending to the LTE-V module. V module.
  • the indication manner of the position of the time domain resource set includes at least one of the following items: the start position of the time domain resource set, the end position of the time domain resource set, the length of the time domain resource set, and the end position of the time domain resource set.
  • the position where the NR-V module receives the indication information of the time domain resource set, or the end position of the time domain resource set is a time interval before the position where the NR-V module receives the indication information of the time domain resource set.
  • the above time interval is the transmission (transmission or transparent transmission) time from the LTE-V module to the NR-V module.
  • the reference point of the starting position of the above-mentioned time-domain resource set is the system frame number, for example, the position where DFN is 0, or the position where SFN is 0.
  • the starting position of the aforementioned time resource set is determined by the reference point and a time offset value.
  • the foregoing time-domain resource set is continuous, for example, the time-domain resource set is a time window.
  • the resources occupied by the LTE-V transmission may include: the resources occupied by the LTE-V transmission of the first terminal and/or the resources occupied by the LTE-V transmission of terminals other than the first terminal, or the resources occupied by the LTE-V transmission of the LTE-V
  • the resource occupied by the transmission may be the resource occupied by the LTE-V transmission included in one time domain resource set.
  • the first information is the SCI of LTE-V transmission.
  • the SCI indicates the resources used by the transmission of the current SCI and the reserved resources.
  • the reserved resources are resources indicated by the SCI and not used. For example, as shown in Figure 11, SCI is transmitted in resource 1, indicating three resources, resource 1, resource 2, and resource 3. Among them, resource 2 and resource 3 have not been used when transmitting SCI, which is called reservation resource.
  • the first information may be sensing information of LTE-V transmission acquired by the first terminal (for example, PSCCH decoding information and RSRP measurement information).
  • the first terminal acquire the sensing information, which are not limited in this application.
  • the LTE-V module of the first terminal performs sensing measurement in the first resource sensing window to obtain sensing information, and then the R18 NR-V module of the first terminal obtains it from the LTE-V module of the first terminal perception information.
  • This application does not limit the implementation manner in which the R18 NR-V module of the first terminal acquires sensing information from the LTE-V module of the first terminal.
  • the R18 NR-V module of the first terminal requests the sensing information in the first resource sensing window from the LTE-V module of the first terminal, and the LTE-V module of the first terminal receives the R18 NR-V After the request of the module, the corresponding perception information is sent to the R18 NR-V module of the first terminal.
  • the LTE-V module of the first terminal regularly sends sensing information to the R18 NR-V module of the first terminal, and the R18 NR-V module of the first terminal acquires sensing information in the first resource sensing window locally.
  • the description of the first resource-aware window can refer to the related description in FIG. Can be the same or different.
  • the first resource awareness window is the above-mentioned time-domain resource set.
  • the R18 NR-V module of the first terminal performs sensing measurement to obtain LTE-V sensing information.
  • the first terminal obtains the perception information from terminals other than the first terminal that use LTE-V wireless access to transmit data or control information.
  • Step 1020 the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information.
  • the first terminal determines the first resource from the first resource pool, and further, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the first terminal determines the first resource from the first resource pool.
  • the first terminal determines the first resource from the first resource pool, which are not limited in this application.
  • the first terminal may determine to determine the first resource from the first resource pool through steps 1 to 2 below.
  • Step 1 the first terminal determines the time domain resource of the first resource.
  • the first terminal determines the time slot where the first resource is located.
  • periodic control resources are configured on the first resource pool, where the configuration period of control resources is N time slots.
  • N 0, 1, 2 or 4.
  • the value of N can also be other values, not limited to 0, 1, 2 or 4.
  • the first terminal determines the time-domain resource of the first resource according to the time-domain resource for transmitting the PSSCH, and the selection of the resource for transmitting the PSSCH can refer to the above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first terminal transmits control information in time slot n+k and the first time slot after time slot n+k in which PSFCH resources exist. That is, the time slot where the first resource is located is the time slot n+k and the first time slot after the time slot n+k where PSFCH resources exist.
  • k reflects the processing capability of the first terminal, which is to consider the delay of processing PSSCH and generating control information of the first terminal, and the value of k can be predefined, pre-configured, or signaled by the network device through RRC configured.
  • K may be 2 or 3; optionally, K is configured on a resource pool.
  • the periodic PSFCH resources configured on the first resource pool can be understood as defining a PSFCH resource set, but whether the PSFCH resources in the PSFCH resource set can be used to transmit control information needs to be further determined.
  • Fig. 12 is an example of the time slot where the first resource is located.
  • the first terminal transmits the PSSCH on the logical time slot 2
  • the first terminal receives the PSFCH on the logical time slot 5.
  • the first terminal transmits the PSSCH on the logical time slot 4
  • the first terminal receives the PSFCH on the logical time slot 7.
  • the first terminal transmits the PSSCH on the logical time slot 5 the first terminal receives the PSFCH on the logical time slot 9.
  • the data transmission of R18 NR-V does not use the periodically configured PSFCH resources.
  • terminals using R18 NR-V transmission consider that the periodically configured PSFCH resources can only be used to transmit control information, not data.
  • the HARQ resources in the subchannel of the time slot should be excluded during rate matching. This can ensure that the terminal device's understanding of whether the PSFCH resource is used for transmission is aligned, and avoid blind detection or decoding failure caused by the terminal device not knowing whether the data is transmitted on the PSFCH resource when receiving data. Blind detection will also increase the realization of the terminal Complexity.
  • the first terminal determines frequency domain resources and code domain resources in the first resources.
  • the first terminal can adopt the method of determining frequency domain resources and code domain resources of PSFCH resources in R16 NR-V.
  • frequency domain resources and code domain resources of PSFCH resources please refer to "frequency domain resources and code domain resources of PSFCH resources" in the terminology description above. code domain resources”, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the terminal may determine whether the first resource is available resource, which are not specifically limited in this application. Exemplarily, The terminal may determine whether the first resource is available through methods 1 to 6 below.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the preset condition is: there is overlap with the resource occupied by the LTE-V transmission determined according to the first information, and the signal quality measurement value is greater than the first threshold, and the candidate resource is the resource selected by the first terminal for transmitting data.
  • a candidate resource, where the candidate resource is L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • a candidate resource is a candidate resource for resource selection for data transmission. It can be understood that a candidate resource can be used for data transmission, or a candidate resource is a resource that can be selected when selecting a resource for data transmission, or a candidate resource belongs to a data resource. , or the candidate resource is a candidate resource when selecting a resource, or the candidate resource is a resource in the selected resource set when selecting a resource.
  • the first time unit includes a first time slot
  • the frequency domain unit includes a subchannel.
  • the candidate resources may be consecutive L subchannels in the first time slot, for example, the set of candidate resources belongs to SA in the "Resources Selected for Transmission of PSSCH" in the term description above.
  • the candidate resource may be “single candidate resource R x,y ” in the term description above.
  • a manner of determining the first threshold may be a manner of determining a threshold used when selecting resources for transmitting data.
  • the measurement value of the above signal quality is a measurement value of signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the above signal quality measurement value is a measurement value of energy on the time domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the measured value of the signal quality may be the measured value of the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the measured value of the energy on the first time slot.
  • the measurement value of the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the preset conditions here can also be described as:
  • Condition 1 SCI is received, and the SCI includes time domain resource indication information, frequency domain resource indication information, resource reservation field, and priority field.
  • Condition 2 The signal quality measurement value corresponding to the resource indicated by the SCI is higher than threshold A.
  • Condition 3 The candidate resource overlaps with the resource indicated in the SCI.
  • threshold A corresponds to the first threshold.
  • the resource indicated by the SCI may be understood as the reserved resource indicated by the SCI. That is, among the resources indicated in the SCI, the resources that have not been used at the time when the SCI is sent.
  • the signal quality measurement value corresponding to the resource indicated by the SCI can be the signal quality measurement value corresponding to the SCI, that is, the signal quality measurement value corresponding to the resource indicated by the SCI can be the signal quality measurement value of the DMRS carried by the PSSCH scheduled by the SCI, or it can be The signal quality measurement value of the DMRS carried by the PSCCH where the SCI is located is not limited.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the candidate resource where the first resource is located and which can be used to transmit data is an unavailable resource
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the preset condition is: it is occupied by the transmission of LTE-V determined according to the first information
  • the candidate resource is the candidate resource when the first terminal performs resource selection for the transmission data
  • the candidate resource is the continuous L frequency domain units in the first time unit
  • L is An integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the preset condition is: there is overlap with the resource occupied by the LTE-V transmission determined according to the first information, and the signal quality measurement value is greater than the second threshold, and the candidate resource is when the first terminal selects the resource for the transmission control information
  • the candidate resources are L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • Candidate resources are candidate resources for resource selection for transmission control information. It can be understood that candidate resources can be used for transmission control information, or candidate resources are resources that can be selected when selecting resources for transmission control information, or candidate resources Belongs to control resources.
  • the first time unit includes a first time slot
  • the frequency domain unit includes a subchannel and a PRB.
  • candidate resources may be consecutive L subchannels in the first time slot.
  • the candidate resources may be L consecutive PRBs in the first time slot.
  • the candidate resource may be consecutive L subchannels of P symbols in the first time slot, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the candidate resource may be a single PSFCH candidate resource as shown in FIG. 13 , and a single PSFCH candidate The resources are symbols in the time domain, and L subch consecutive subchannels in the frequency domain.
  • the candidate resources may be L consecutive PRBs of P symbols in the first time slot, where P is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second threshold here may be a threshold used when selecting resources for transmission control information.
  • the second threshold may be different from the first threshold above.
  • the second threshold is smaller than the above first threshold.
  • the second threshold comes from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set. It can be understood that the threshold table or threshold set to which the second threshold belongs is different from the threshold table or threshold set to which the first threshold belongs, or the threshold table or threshold set to which the second threshold belongs is different from the threshold table or threshold set to which the first threshold belongs are set and/or configured independently.
  • the second threshold is an absolute threshold. It can be understood that the second threshold is not configured through a threshold table or a threshold set, but may be an independent threshold.
  • the measurement value of the above signal quality is a measurement value of signal quality corresponding to the transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the above signal quality measurement value is a measurement value of energy on the time domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the measured value of the signal quality may be the measured value of the energy on the P symbols of the first time slot, or the measured value of the energy on the first time slot.
  • the measurement value of the foregoing energy may be represented by at least one of RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the preset conditions here can also be described as:
  • Condition 1 SCI is received, and the SCI includes time-domain resource indication information, frequency-domain resource indication information, a resource reservation field, and a priority field (which may also be replaced by a PPPP field).
  • Condition 2 The signal quality measurement value corresponding to the resource indicated by the SCI is higher than the threshold B.
  • Condition 3 The candidate resource overlaps with the resource indicated in the SCI.
  • the threshold B corresponds to the second threshold.
  • the resource indicated by the SCI may be understood as the reserved resource indicated by the SCI. That is, among the resources indicated in the SCI, the resources that have not been used at the time when the SCI is sent.
  • the signal quality measurement value corresponding to the resource indicated by the SCI can be the signal quality measurement value corresponding to the SCI, that is, the signal quality measurement value corresponding to the resource indicated by the SCI can be the signal quality measurement value of the DMRS carried by the PSSCH scheduled by the SCI, or it can be The signal quality measurement value of the DMRS carried by the PSCCH where the SCI is located is not limited.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the candidate resource where the first resource is located and which can be used to transmit the control information is an unavailable resource
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the preset condition is: there is overlap with the resource occupied by the transmission of LTE-V determined according to the first information, and the signal quality measurement value is greater than the second threshold, and the candidate resource is when the first terminal selects the resource for the transmission control information
  • the candidate resources are L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the preset condition is: there is overlap with the resource occupied by the LTE-V transmission determined according to the first information, and the signal quality measurement value is greater than the third threshold.
  • the first resource is a PRB of P symbols in the first time slot.
  • the third threshold here may be different from the first threshold above.
  • the third threshold is smaller than the above first threshold.
  • the third threshold belongs to an independently configured threshold table or threshold set. It can be understood that the threshold table or threshold set to which the third threshold belongs is different from the threshold table or threshold set to which the first threshold belongs, or the threshold table or threshold set to which the third threshold belongs is different from the threshold table or threshold set to which the first threshold belongs are set and/or configured independently.
  • the third threshold is an absolute threshold. It can be understood that the third threshold is not configured through a threshold table or a threshold set, but may be an independent threshold.
  • the third threshold may be determined according to CBR. For example, when the resource pool is congested, the third threshold is lower, and the number of resources in the candidate resource set is less, thereby achieving the purpose of link resource congestion.
  • the preset conditions here can also be described as:
  • Condition 1 SCI is received, and the SCI includes time domain resource indication information, frequency domain resource indication information, resource reservation field, and priority field.
  • Condition 2 The signal quality measurement value corresponding to the resource indicated by the SCI is higher than the threshold C.
  • Condition 3 the first resource overlaps with the resources indicated in the SCI.
  • the threshold C corresponds to the third threshold.
  • the third threshold is determined according to the priority in condition 1 and the priority of the control information to be sent.
  • the signal quality measurement value corresponding to the resource indicated by the SCI can be the signal quality measurement value corresponding to the SCI, that is, the signal quality measurement value corresponding to the resource indicated by the SCI can be the signal quality measurement value of the DMRS carried by the PSSCH scheduled by the SCI, or it can be The signal quality measurement value of the DMRS carried by the PSCCH where the SCI is located is not limited.
  • condition 2 may also be replaced by: the measured value of the energy of the resource indicated by the SCI is obtained, and the measured value of the energy of the time domain unit where the first resource is located is higher than a threshold.
  • the energy measurement value may be represented by at least one of RSSI, RINR, and SNR.
  • a threshold may be irrelevant to the priority, or may be related to the priority of the control information to be sent.
  • the energy measurement value on the time domain unit where the first resource is located corresponds to the energy measurement value of the resource indicated by the SCI.
  • the measured value of the energy of the resource indicated by the SCI may be converted into the measured value of the energy of the time domain unit where the first resource is located.
  • the measured value of energy can also be replaced by measured energy.
  • condition 2 may also be replaced by: the energy measurement value of the resource indicated by the SCI is acquired, and the energy measurement value of the first resource is higher than a threshold.
  • the measured value of the energy of the first resource corresponds to the measured value of the energy of the resource indicated by the SCI.
  • the measured value of the energy of the resource indicated by the SCI may be converted into a measured value of the energy of the first resource.
  • the energy measurement value may be at least one of RSSI, RINR, and SNR.
  • a threshold may be irrelevant to the priority, or may be related to the priority of the control information to be sent.
  • the measured value of energy can also be replaced by measured energy.
  • the first terminal directly determines whether the first resource is an available resource according to a preset condition. When the first resource does not meet the foregoing preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource. When the first resource satisfies the foregoing preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource.
  • the description manner of the above-mentioned preset condition is only an example, and other description manners may also be used, as long as the condition expressed in this manner is the same as the above-mentioned preset condition.
  • the scheme of the present application is described above in the negative manner that the candidate resource or the first resource "does not meet the preset condition", and it can also be replaced by the candidate resource or the first resource "satisfies certain or certain conditions ", one or some of the conditions here are the complement of the above preset conditions.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the priority field included in the SCI may also be replaced by the PPPP field.
  • resource indication information for indicating resources occupied by transmission of the second communication protocol may also be used. That is, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource or an unavailable resource according to the first information and the resource indication information transmitted from the second communication protocol. No limitation is imposed in this application.
  • Step 1030 the first terminal uses R18 NR-V to transmit control information on the first resource.
  • the first terminal may determine the resource occupied by the LTE-V transmission according to the first information, Further, according to the resource occupied by the LTE-V transmission, it is determined that the first resource in the first resource pool is an available resource, and the R18 NR-V is used to transmit the control information on the first resource.
  • the first terminal considers the LTE-
  • the resources occupied by the transmission of V can avoid using the resources occupied by the transmission of LTE-V to transmit the control information of R18 NR-V, thereby helping to avoid resource conflicts between the transmission of LTE-V and the transmission of R18 NR-V.
  • the above technical solution can realize the transmission of R18 NR-V control information, thereby helping to improve the reliability of R18 NR-V data transmission.
  • the first resource may be used to transmit data or control information.
  • the first resource when it is determined that the first resource is an available resource, the first resource is used for transmitting control information, but not for transmitting data; when it is determined that the first resource is an unavailable resource, the first resource can be used for transmitting data, It is not used to transmit control information. In this way, resource utilization can be improved.
  • the first resource is not used for transmitting data.
  • the first resource when it is determined that the first resource is an available resource, the first resource is used to transmit control information rather than data; when it is determined that the first resource is an unavailable resource, the first resource is not used to transmit data, nor Not used for transmission of control information. Since the sensing results of the LTE-V transmission by the terminals of the transmitting and receiving parties are not necessarily the same, it is possible that the terminals of the transmitting and receiving parties may have different judgment results on whether the first resource is available, which will lead to conflicts between sending and receiving (for example, receiving data and Conflict between sending HARQ information, or conflict between receiving HARQ information and sending data). If the first resource is not used for data transmission, conflicts between sending and receiving can be avoided.
  • the method for receiving the data corresponding to the first terminal may refer to the prior art, which will not be described in detail here.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a data sending method 1300 provided by this application.
  • the method 1300 can be applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 above, but is not limited thereto.
  • the method 1300 may be executed by the second terminal, or may be executed by a module or unit applied to the second terminal. For convenience of description, it is collectively referred to as the second terminal hereinafter.
  • Method 1300 can include at least some of the following.
  • Step 1310 the second terminal obtains the first information.
  • the first information is information related to LTE-V transmission, and is used to determine resources occupied by LTE-V transmission in the first resource pool.
  • the first resource pool is the resource pool of R18 NR-V.
  • the manner in which the second terminal acquires the first information is the same as the manner in which the first terminal acquires the first information, and reference may be made to the relevant description of step 1010 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 1320 the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information.
  • the manner in which the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information is the same as the manner in which the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information. You can refer to the relevant description of step 1020 above, which will not be repeated here. repeat.
  • Step 1330 the second terminal determines the second resource according to the first resource.
  • the second terminal may determine that the first candidate resource corresponding to the first resource is also an unavailable resource, where the first candidate resource is a resource that can be used to transmit data , that is, resources used to transmit the PSSCH.
  • the first resource is an available resource
  • the second terminal can use the PSSCH resource corresponding to the first resource to transmit data; when the first resource is an unavailable resource, the second terminal cannot use the PSSCH resource corresponding to the first resource transfer data. In this case, if the second terminal has already selected the first candidate resource for data transmission, the second terminal may reselect the resource for data transmission.
  • the second terminal when the second terminal selects the second resource for transmitting data, the second resource satisfies: the second resource is an available resource, and the control resource corresponding to the second resource is also available. use resources.
  • the second terminal may lower the priority of selecting the PSSCH resource.
  • the second terminal preferentially selects a PSSCH resource whose corresponding PSFCH resource is an available resource.
  • the candidate resource set determined by the second terminal includes the first type of candidate resources and the second type of candidate resources. The first type of candidate resource satisfies the condition: the candidate resource is an available resource; the second type of candidate resource satisfies the condition: the candidate resource is an available resource, and the control resource corresponding to the candidate resource is an available resource.
  • the second terminal selects resources from the second type of candidate resources.
  • the control information (for example, HARQ) feedback mechanism of the data to be sent determined by the second terminal is not enabled, the second terminal selects resources from the first type of candidate resources or the set of candidate resources.
  • This implementation method can effectively support the second terminal to enable a control information (for example, HARQ) feedback mechanism when sending data, thereby ensuring the reliability of data transmission.
  • the second terminal determines a first candidate resource set according to the first resource, and the first candidate resource set is a candidate resource set when the second terminal selects resources for transmitting data;
  • a second resource is determined from a set of candidate resources. That is, the first candidate resource set determined by the second terminal satisfies that: the resources in the first candidate resource set are available resources, and the control resources corresponding to the resources are also available resources.
  • the second resource corresponding to the first resource is a resource in the first candidate resource set
  • the first candidate resource set is a candidate resource set when the second terminal selects resources for transmitting data
  • the second terminal determines a second candidate resource set, and the second candidate resource set is a candidate resource set when the second terminal selects resources for transmitting data;
  • the second resource is determined in the candidate resource set. That is, the second terminal determines the second candidate resource set according to the "method of selecting resources for transmitting PSSCH" introduced in the above-mentioned term explanation section.
  • the resources in the second candidate resource set are available resources, and the resources in the second candidate resource set
  • the control resource corresponding to the resource may be an available resource or an unavailable resource; then the second terminal selects the second resource from the second candidate resource set according to the first resource. That is, the second terminal selects the second resource among the resources whose corresponding control resources are available resources in the second candidate resource set. In this way, the second resource is an available resource, and the control resource corresponding to the second resource is also an available resource.
  • the second terminal determines the second resource according to the first resource. It can also be understood that the second terminal determines the second resource according to the first information. Step 1340, the second terminal sends the first data on the second resource by using the second communication protocol.
  • the second terminal may determine the resource occupied by the LTE-V transmission according to the first information, further determine the first resource as an available resource according to the resource occupied by the LTE-V transmission, and determine the transmission according to the first resource.
  • Second resource for R18 NR-V data the second terminal determines that the second resource used to transmit R18 NR-V data satisfies at the same time: the second resource is an available resource, and the resource corresponding to the second resource is used to transmit R18 NR-V control information for available resources.
  • the second terminal considers the resources occupied by LTE-V transmission when determining the available resources for transmitting R18 NR-V control information, and can avoid using the resources occupied by LTE-V transmission to transmit R18 NR -V control information, thus helping to avoid LTE-V transmission and R18 NR-V transmission resource conflict.
  • the second resource satisfies at the same time: the second resource is an available resource, and the resource corresponding to the second resource used to transmit the control information of R18 NR-V is an available resource, which can ensure the control information (for example, HARQ) feedback mechanism. Normal transmission, which helps to improve the reliability of R18 NR-V data transmission.
  • the first resource may be used to transmit data or control information.
  • the first resource when it is determined that the first resource is an available resource, the first resource is used for transmitting control information, but not for transmitting data; when it is determined that the first resource is an unavailable resource, the first resource can be used for transmitting data, It is not used to transmit control information. In this way, resource utilization can be improved.
  • the first resource is not used for transmitting data.
  • the first resource when it is determined that the first resource is an available resource, the first resource is used to transmit control information rather than data; when it is determined that the first resource is an unavailable resource, the first resource is not used to transmit data, nor Not used for transmission of control information. Since the sensing results of the LTE-V transmission by the terminals of the transmitting and receiving parties are not necessarily the same, it is possible that the terminals of the transmitting and receiving parties may have different judgment results on whether the first resource is available, which will lead to conflicts between sending and receiving (for example, receiving data and Conflict between sending HARQ information, or conflict between receiving HARQ information and sending data). If the first resource is not used for data transmission, conflicts between sending and receiving can be avoided.
  • the second terminal may enable control information feedback.
  • the second terminal transmits data on the PSSCH resource, and the first resource corresponding to the PSSCH resource is an available resource, then the second terminal may enable feedback of control information. If the second terminal determines that the first resource is an unavailable resource and/or does not upload data on the PSSCH resource corresponding to the first resource, the second terminal may disable control information feedback. In this way, it helps to avoid interference when receiving control information.
  • the second terminal may send second information to the first terminal, where the second information is used to indicate that the first resource
  • a terminal sends control information to a second terminal.
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and transmits data and second information on the PSSCH resource corresponding to the first resource, where the second information is used to instruct the first terminal to send control information to the second terminal .
  • the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and transmits second information and data on a second resource corresponding to the first resource, where the second information includes HARQ enabling information.
  • the second information is carried in the second-level SCI.
  • the second information is HARQ enabling information in the SCI
  • the control information is HARQ information. It can be understood that if the first terminal receives data and second information (including HARQ enabling information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends the HARQ information corresponding to the data to the second terminal, that is, the control information is HARQ information.
  • the second information is CSI trigger information in the SCI
  • the control information is CSI feedback information. It can be understood that, if the first terminal receives data and second information (including CSI trigger information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends CSI feedback information to the second terminal, that is, the control information is CSI feedback information.
  • the second information is trigger information of resource conflict indication information in the SCI
  • the control information is resource conflict indication information. It can be understood that if the first terminal receives the data and the second information (including the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends the resource conflict indication information to the second terminal, that is, the control information is resource conflict Instructions.
  • HARQ enabling information and CSI triggering information are indicated in the second-level SCI.
  • the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information is indicated in the first-level SCI.
  • the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information may be time domain resource indication information and frequency domain resource indication information in the first level SCI.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a method 1400 for receiving control information provided by this application.
  • the method 1400 can be applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 above, but is not limited thereto.
  • the method 1400 may be executed by the second terminal, or may be executed by a module or unit applied to the second terminal. For convenience of description, it is collectively referred to as the second terminal hereinafter.
  • Method 1400 can include at least some of the following.
  • Step 1410 the second terminal sends the first data to the first terminal on the second resource by using the second communication protocol.
  • step 1410 is not specifically limited.
  • the second terminal uses the method shown in FIG. 14 to send the first data to the first terminal.
  • the method 1300 refers to the method 1300 .
  • the second terminal sends the first data to the first terminal by using the "method of selecting resources for transmitting the PSSCH" introduced in the above term explanation section.
  • Step 1420 the second terminal sends second information corresponding to the first data to the first terminal.
  • the second information is used to instruct the first terminal to send control information.
  • the second information corresponding to the first data can be understood as the second information sent simultaneously with the first data, the second information is used to schedule the first data, and the second information is used to trigger the terminal receiving the first data (that is, the first The terminal) sends control information related to the first data (for example, HARQ information, resource conflict indication information, CSI feedback information, etc.).
  • the second information is a PSCCH that schedules a PSSCH that carries the first data.
  • the second information is carried in the second-level SCI.
  • the second information is HARQ enabling information in the SCI
  • the control information is HARQ information. It can be understood that if the first terminal receives data and second information (including HARQ enabling information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends the HARQ information corresponding to the data to the second terminal, that is, the control information is HARQ information.
  • the second information is CSI trigger information in the SCI
  • the control information is CSI feedback information. It can be understood that, if the first terminal receives data and second information (including CSI trigger information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends CSI feedback information to the second terminal, that is, the control information is CSI feedback information.
  • the second information is trigger information of resource conflict indication information in the SCI
  • the control information is resource conflict indication information. It can be understood that if the first terminal receives the data and the second information (including the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information) from the second terminal, the first terminal sends the resource conflict indication information to the second terminal, that is, the control information is resource conflict Instructions.
  • HARQ enabling information and CSI triggering information are indicated in the second-level SCI.
  • the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information is indicated in the first-level SCI.
  • the trigger information of the resource conflict indication information may be time domain resource indication information and frequency domain resource indication information in the first level SCI.
  • Step 1430 the second terminal obtains the first information.
  • the first information is information related to LTE-V transmission, and is used to determine resources occupied by LTE-V transmission in the first resource pool.
  • the first resource pool is the resource pool of R18 NR-V.
  • Step 1440 the second terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource according to the first information.
  • steps 1430-1440 reference may be made to steps 1310-1320, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 1450 the second terminal receives control information on the first resource by using the second communication protocol.
  • steps 1430-1440 to be performed before step 1450, and the order of steps 1410, 1420, 1430, and 1440 is not limited.
  • steps 1430 - 1440 may be performed before step 1420 .
  • the first The second terminal uses the method shown in FIG. 14 to send the first data to the first terminal, that is, steps 1430-1440 are implemented through step 1410. It should be noted that, in this case, after step 1410 and before step 1450, the second terminal may not repeatedly perform step 1430 and step 1440 . Certainly, for the accuracy of the result, the second terminal may also perform steps 1430-1440 again.
  • steps 1430 - 1440 may be performed after step 1420 .
  • the second terminal instructs the first terminal to send control information to the second terminal, determines the resource occupied by the LTE-V transmission according to the first information, and determines the resource occupied by the LTE-V transmission according to the resource occupied by the LTE-V transmission.
  • a resource is an available resource
  • the second terminal considers the resources occupied by the transmission of LTE-V when determining the available resources for transmitting the control information of R18 NR-V, and can avoid using the resources occupied by the transmission of LTE-V to transmit R18 NR -V control information, which helps to avoid resource conflicts between LTE-V transmission and R18 NR-V transmission.
  • the first resource may be used to transmit data or control information.
  • the first resource when it is determined that the first resource is an available resource, the first resource is used for transmitting control information, but not for transmitting data; when it is determined that the first resource is an unavailable resource, the first resource can be used for transmitting data, It is not used to transmit control information. In this way, resource utilization can be improved.
  • the first resource is not used for transmitting data.
  • the first resource when it is determined that the first resource is an available resource, the first resource is used to transmit control information rather than data; when it is determined that the first resource is an unavailable resource, the first resource is not used to transmit data, nor Not used for transmission of control information. Since the sensing results of the LTE-V transmission by the terminals of the transmitting and receiving parties are not necessarily the same, it is possible that the terminals of the transmitting and receiving parties may have different judgment results on whether the first resource is available, which will lead to conflicts between sending and receiving (for example, receiving data and Conflict between sending HARQ information, or conflict between receiving HARQ information and sending data). If the first resource is not used for data transmission, conflicts between sending and receiving can be avoided.
  • method 1000 may be implemented individually, or may be combined in an appropriate manner.
  • the method can be applied to the case where the first communication protocol shares the first resource pool with the second communication protocol, and at the same time, the first resource pool shares frequency spectrum with the second resource pool of the third communication protocol by means of time division multiplexing or frequency division multiplexing. Scenes.
  • This application does not limit the specific types of the first communication protocol, the second communication protocol, and the third communication protocol.
  • the first communication protocol is LTE-V
  • the second communication protocol is R18 NR-V
  • the third communication protocol is R16 NR.
  • -V is used as an example to describe.
  • Fig. 16 is an example of frequency spectrum sharing by the first resource pool and the second resource pool in a time-division multiplexing manner.
  • the first resource pool of LTE-V and the second resource pool of R16 NR-V are time-division multiplexed, wherein the first resource pool of LTE-V includes physical time slots 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, and 8, and R16 NR -
  • the second resource pool of V includes physical time slots 0, 3, 6, and 9.
  • LTE-V and R18NR-V share the first resource pool, and R18 NR-V obtains resources dynamically.
  • Figure 17 is an example of the mapping relationship between R16 NR-V PSSCH resources and PSFCH resources.
  • the number of subchannels in resource pool 2 is 3
  • the number of time slots is 4 (that is, physical time slots 0, 3, 6, and 9)
  • the number of subchannels includes 10 PRB
  • the number of PRBs for transmitting HARQ information is 12 (numbered 0-11).
  • each subchannel can correspond to 2 resource blocks.
  • subchannel (0,0) corresponds to PRB0 and PRB1 in logical slot 3 (ie, physical slot 9).
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of a method 1700 for sending control information provided by this application.
  • the method 1700 can be applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 above, but is not limited thereto.
  • the method 1700 may be executed by the first terminal, or may be executed by a module or unit applied to the first terminal. For convenience of description, it is collectively referred to as the first terminal hereinafter.
  • the R18 NR-V terminal can use the resources in the first resource pool to receive data, and use the control resources in the second resource pool of the R16NR-V to send control information. Specifically, R18 NR-V can use the remaining resources in the control resources of R16 NR-V to send control information.
  • the remaining resources here may include the following two types.
  • the first type is that the control resources of R16 NR-V are not configured as resources for transmitting R16 NR-V control information, that is, the control resources of R16 NR-V are configured to transmit R16 NR-V
  • the resources of the control information are frequency division multiplexed resources.
  • the control resource of R16 NR-V includes 30 PRBs, but only 12 PRBs (such as PRB0 to PRB11 in FIG. 16) are configured to transmit the control information of R16 NR-V, so that the remaining The 18 PRBs (such as PRB12 to PRB29 in Figure 16) can be used to transmit R18 NR-V control information.
  • the second type is the resources configured to transmit R16 NR-V control information, the remaining resources other than the resources actually used to transmit R16 NR-V control information, that is, the R16 NR-V control resources and A frequency-division multiplexed or code-division multiplexed resource configured as a resource for transmitting R16 NR-V control information.
  • the number of CS pairs is 3, only one PRB is needed for PSFCH transmission, and each sub-channel corresponds to 2 PRBs, then each sub-channel corresponds to 6 (2*the number of CS pairs) resources (including the frequency domain dimension and Code domain dimension), there may be 5, 6 or uncertain resources not used to transmit R16 NR-V control information.
  • each member terminal in the group needs a dedicated resource to send ACK or NACK. In this case, there may be no remaining resources, depending on the number of group members That is, the group size.
  • the resource used to transmit PSSCH corresponds to more than one resource used to transmit PSFCH, except for the resources actually used to transmit R16 NR-V control information
  • the remaining resources other than resources include frequency domain resources and/or code domain resources.
  • the control resource used to transmit the control information of R18 NR-V may be pre-configured or configured by a network device.
  • the PRB set used to transmit the control information of R18 NR-V can be pre-configured using a bitmap or configured by the base station.
  • the set of resources configured to transmit the control information of R16 NR-V in the control resources of R16 NR-V is called the first resource set, and the upper and lower control resources of R16 NR-V
  • a set of resources configured to transmit R18 NR-V control information is called a second resource set. It should be noted that the second resource set and the first resource set may be configured independently, for example, configured through different parameters.
  • the method 1700 may include at least part of the following content.
  • Step 1710 the first terminal determines the third resource from the set of control resources.
  • the set of control resources is a set of control resources in the second resource pool of R16 NR-V.
  • the first resource set in the control resource set is configured to transmit R16 NR-V control information.
  • the third resource is different from the resources in the first set of resources.
  • the third resource is frequency-division multiplexed and/or code-division multiplexed with the resources in the first resource set.
  • the above control resource set is the control resource set of R16 NR-V, that is, the above control resource set is the first resource set, which can be understood as the control resource set of R18 NR-V and the control resource set of R16 NR-V
  • the third resource and the resources in the first resource set may be frequency-division multiplexed or code-division multiplexed, or both frequency-division multiplexed and code-division multiplexed.
  • the first terminal since the first terminal transmits the control information of the R18 NR-V by using resources different from the resources configured to transmit the control information of the R16 NR-V in the control resource set of the R16 NR-V, the spectrum can be improved. utilization efficiency.
  • the above-mentioned control resource set includes a first resource set and a second resource set, wherein the first resource set is the R16 NR-V control resource set, and the second resource set is the R18 NR-V control resource set.
  • the third resource belongs to the second resource set.
  • the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set are frequency division multiplexed. In other words, there is no intersection between the second resource set and the first resource set in the frequency domain.
  • the first resource set includes PRB0, PRB1, and PRB2, and the second resource set includes PRB5, PRB6, and PRB7.
  • the foregoing control resource set includes a first resource set and a second resource set.
  • the first resource set is the control resource set of R16 NR-V
  • the second resource set is the control resource set of R18 NR-V.
  • the third resource belongs to the second resource set.
  • the resources in the second resource set are frequency-division multiplexed with the resources in the first resource set, or the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set have the same frequency domain and different code domains.
  • the first resource set includes PRB0, PRB1, and PRB2, and the second resource set includes PRB2, PRB3, and PRB4.
  • PRB2 can be used to transmit the control information of the second communication protocol and the control information of the third communication protocol.
  • PRB2 of the second communication protocol and PRB2 of the third communication protocol can be code division multiplexed .
  • the PRB0 and PRB1 in the second resource set are frequency division multiplexed with the resources in the second resource set.
  • the second resource set in the control resource set is configured independently from the first resource set, the resources in the second resource set are used to transmit R18 NR-V control information, and the first resource set is configured independently. Three resources belong to the second set of resources.
  • the second set of resources is a set of HARQ resources used to transmit R18 NR-V.
  • the first resource set is a set of HARQ resources used to transmit R16 NR-V.
  • the second set of resources may be the first set of resources.
  • the configuration signaling of the second set of resources is the signaling of configuring the first set of resources.
  • the second resource set may be different from the first resource set.
  • the second resource set is configured using signaling.
  • the configuration parameters of the second resource set are different from the configuration parameters of the first resource set.
  • the second set of resources is a set of HARQ resources used to transmit R18 NR-V.
  • the first resource set is a set of HARQ resources used to transmit R17NR-V.
  • the third resource set is a set of resources used to transmit the resource conflict indication information of R17NR-V.
  • the second set of resources may be the first set of resources.
  • the configuration signaling of the second set of resources is the signaling of configuring the first set of resources.
  • the second resource set may be a third resource set.
  • the configuration signaling of the second resource set is the signaling for configuring the third resource set.
  • the second resource set may be different from the first resource set and the third resource set.
  • the second resource set is configured using signaling.
  • the configuration parameters of the second resource set are different from the configuration parameters of the first resource set and the third resource set.
  • the first terminal determines the third resource from the control resource set, and needs to determine the time domain resource, the frequency domain resource and the code domain resource of the third resource. It is assumed that the first terminal knows the following information: the first resource pool and the mapping relationship between the first resource pool and the physical time slot; the first resource pool is a shared resource pool with LTE-V; and the second resource pool and the physical time slot Gap mapping relationship.
  • the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set may be frequency division multiplexed.
  • the first terminal determines the time-domain resource of the third resource
  • the first terminal may determine the time domain resource of the third resource according to the third resource and the first mapping relationship.
  • the first mapping relationship includes the mapping relationship between the first physical time slot and the second physical time slot, and the first physical time slot is the last physical time slot included in the fourth resource (that is, the physical time slot where the end position of the fourth resource is located).
  • the second physical time slot is the first physical time slot containing control resources that meets the first time interval with the first physical time slot, and the second physical time slot is after the first physical time slot.
  • a unit of the first time interval may be a physical time slot.
  • the value range of the first time interval may be 2 or 3.
  • the first time interval is preconfigured, predefined or configured by the base station.
  • the physical time slot is used here because the mapping relationship between PSSCH and PSFCH of R16 NR-V is determined according to the logical time slot in the second resource pool, and the first resource pool of R18 NR-V also has its own logical time slot index, which will As a result, the index of the logical time slot of the first resource pool and the index of the logical time slot of the second resource pool cannot be directly associated with each other.
  • both the first resource pool and the second resource pool have a mapping relationship with physical time slots, so the mapping of the PSSCH resources in the first resource pool to the PSFCH resources in the second resource pool of R16 NR-V can be determined according to the physical time slots relation.
  • the last physical time slot included in the fourth resource is physical time slot n
  • select the nearest physical time slot with PSFCH resources in the second resource pool Time slots are used to transmit control information.
  • the value of the minimum processing delay k of the PSSCH-to-control information can be pre-configured or configured by the base station.
  • Fig. 19 is an example of the mapping relationship between PSSCH resources and PSFCH resources.
  • the time slots from logical time slot 0 to logical time slot 5 of LTE-V satisfy the requirement that time slot n+2 or the first time slot containing PSFCH after that is physical time slot 9
  • the last physical time slot included in the fourth resource is physical time slot 2, 4, 5, or 7, the corresponding time slot for transmitting control information is physical time slot 9.
  • the first resource pool is a shared resource pool, it is impossible to determine whether a certain subchannel in the first resource pool is used by LTE-V or R18 NR-V, so when performing the mapping from PSSCH to PSFCH, it cannot be independently
  • the resources used to transmit the data of R18 NR-V and the PSFCH resources of R16 NR-V are mapped, so the resources in the first resource pool (including the resources used to transmit the data of LTE-V or the data of R18 NR-V resources) need to be mapped to the PSFCH resources of R16 NR-V.
  • the first terminal determines the frequency domain resource of the third resource
  • the first terminal determines the frequency domain resource of the third resource according to the fourth resource and the second mapping relationship.
  • the second mapping relationship includes a mapping relationship between frequency domain resources of the fourth resource and frequency domain resources of the third resource.
  • the second mapping relationship may be determined in the following manner. Specifically, a PRB set (second resource set) is preconfigured in the first terminal or configured by the base station for the first terminal, and the first terminal performs PSFCH transmission on one PRB in the PRB set, where the PRB set belongs to Type 1 surplus resource.
  • the PRB of the feedback resource allocated by the first terminal for the data transmitted on the resource corresponding to the logical time slot i and the subchannel j satisfies the following interval:
  • N subch is the number of sub-channels, 0 ⁇ j ⁇ N subch .
  • the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set both satisfy the relationship of frequency division multiplexing.
  • the PRB used by the third resource satisfies the following formula:
  • the value in is the CS logarithm.
  • the value is 1 or
  • the PID is the physical layer source ID included in the second-level SCI that schedules the PSSCH.
  • control information is resource conflict indication information
  • M ID 0.
  • the P ID is the physical layer source ID included in the second-level SCI of the terminal that is provided with resource conflict indication information and is instructed to reserve resources in conflict.
  • the PRB used by the third resource satisfies the following formula:
  • the value in is the CS logarithm.
  • the value is 1 or
  • the P ID is the physical layer source ID included in the second-level SCI that schedules the PSSCH.
  • ⁇ may ensure that the third resource and the resource used to transmit the third communication protocol HARQ are frequency-division multiplexed or code-division multiplexed. Resource conflicts are avoided.
  • the first terminal determines the code domain resource of the third resource
  • the first terminal determines the code domain resource of the third resource according to the first CS pair table, where the first CS pair table is the CS pair table of R16 NR-V.
  • the first CS pair table may be as shown in Table 3.
  • the number of PRBs allocated by the first terminal to slot i and subchannel j satisfy:
  • the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set may support frequency division multiplexing and code division multiplexing, or may only support code division multiplexing.
  • the manner in which the first terminal determines the code domain resource of the third resource is described below.
  • the R18 NR-V cannot know whether the transmission of the R16 NR-V is unicast, multicast, or broadcast, the R18 NR-V cannot know whether there are remaining resources in the PSFCH resources configured to transmit the HARQ information of the R16 NR-V. If R16 NR-V sends the occupancy of PSFCH resources to R18 NR-V, R18 NR-V determines the resources used to transmit HARQ information according to the obtained information, considering the relationship between R18 NR-V and R16 NR-V transmission delay, R18 NR-V may not work or work inefficiently. In this case, this application can allocate different code domain resources for R18 NR-V and R16 NR-V to prevent R18 NR-V from affecting the transmission of control information of R16 NR-V and improve the reliability of transmission control information.
  • the first terminal may determine the code domain resource of the third resource according to the second CS pair table.
  • the second CS pair table may be pre-configured or configured by the base station, and the second CS table is different from the first CS table.
  • the CS pair corresponding to the first CS pair in the second CS pair table is different from the CS pair corresponding to the first CS pair in the first CS pair table used by R16 NR-V. In other words, it corresponds to For the same CS pair, R18 NR-V and R16 NR-V correspond to different CS pairs.
  • the maximum number of CS pairs for R18 NR-V is W.
  • W may be RRC configured (the network device is configured using RRC parameters), or predefined, or preconfigured. Exemplarily, W is 6 or 3.
  • the CS pair of R18 NR-V contains at least one of the following conditions:
  • the number of CS pairs is 1: R16 NR-V uses the first CS pair, and the first CS pair indicates the value 1 and the value 2 (the value 2 is the CS value paired with the value 1). R18 NR-V uses the second CS pair, and the second CS pair indicates the value 3 and the value 4 (the value 4 is the CS value paired with the value 3). The value 1 is different from the value 3.
  • the CS pair is (A, B), where the index of the CS pair may only indicate A, and B is the CS value paired with A.
  • the value 1 is 0, and the value 3 can be any one of 2, 3, 4, and 5.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), the value 1 is 0, and the value 2 is 6; the second CS pair is (3, 9), that is, the value 3 is 3, and the value 4 is 9.
  • the orthogonality between the first CS pair and the second CS pair is the best, and the interference between the R18 NR-V transmission and the R16 NR-V transmission is small.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), and the second CS pair is (2, 8).
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), and the first CS pair is (4, 10).
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), and the first CS pair is (5, 11).
  • the number of CS pairs is 2: R16 NR-V uses the first CS pair, and the first CS pair indicates a value of 5 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 6), and a value of 7 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 6). value 8). R18 NR-V uses the second CS pair, and the second CS pair indicates a value of 9 (the corresponding paired CS is a value of 10), and a value of 11 (the corresponding paired CS is a value of 12). Wherein, the values 5 and 7 are different from the values 9 and 11.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), (3, 9), and the second CS pair is any of (1, 7), (2, 8), (4, 10), (5, 11) two.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), (3, 9), the second CS pair is (1, 7), (2, 8), or, the first CS pair is (0, 6) , (3,9), the second CS pair is (2,8), (4,10), or the first CS pair is (0,6), (3,9), the second CS pair is (4, 10), (5, 11), or the first CS pair is (0, 6), (3, 9), the second CS pair is (2, 8), (5, 11), or the first CS pair is (0,6), (3,9), the second CS pair is (1,7), (5,11), or the first CS pair is (0,6), (3,9), the second CS pair is The pairs are (1, 7), (4, 10). At this time, there is still a certain degree of orthogonality between the first CS pair and the second CS pair, and
  • the number of CS pairs is 3: R16 NR-V uses the first CS pair, the first CS pair indicates a value of 12 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 13), and the value is 14 (the corresponding paired CS is the value The value is 15), and the value is 16 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 17).
  • R18 NR-V uses the second CS pair, the second CS pair indicates the value 17 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 18), the value 19 (the corresponding paired CS is the value 20), and the value 21 (the corresponding The paired CS of is the value 22). Among them, the value 12, the value 14 and the value 16 are different from the value 17, the value 19 and the value 21.
  • the first CS pair is (0, 6), (2, 8), (4, 10); the second CS pair is (1, 7), (3, 9), (5, 11).
  • the interference between the R18 NR-V transmission and the R16 NR-V transmission is reduced as much as possible.
  • the CS pair may be configured by RRC, or predefined or preconfigured.
  • the second CS may include at least one entry in Table 4 to Table 6 (for example, the second CS pair table may include at least one row in Table 4 to Table 6).
  • Table 4, Table 5 and Table 6 are examples of CS pair tables that R18 NR-V can adopt.
  • the second CS pair table can be configured for the first terminal by means of predefinition, preconfiguration or configuration of m' 0 or ⁇ by the base station, or by predefinition, preconfiguration or configuration of the CS pair table by the base station
  • the method directly configures the second CS pair table for the first terminal, which is not limited in this application.
  • the R16 NR-V terminal will use CS pairs 0, 2, and 4; according to Table 4, Table 5 or Table 6, the R18 NR-V terminal will use Use CS pairs 1, 3, 5.
  • the number of CS pairs configured for the terminal is 2, according to Table 3, R16 NR-V terminals will use CS pairs 0, 3; according to Table 4 or 6, R18 NR-V terminals will use CS pairs 1, 4, or according to Table 5.
  • R18 NR-V terminals will use CS pair 2, 5.
  • FIG. 20 is an example of frequency domain resources and code domain resources corresponding to a subchannel.
  • each subchannel corresponds to 6 candidate PSFCH resources.
  • each subchannel corresponds to 3 candidate PSFCH resources.
  • the resources in the second resource set and the resources in the first resource set may only be frequency-division multiplexed, may only be code-division multiplexed, or may support both frequency-division multiplexing and code-division multiplexing.
  • the manner in which the first terminal determines the code domain resource of the third resource is described below.
  • the first terminal determines to use the first CS pair table or the second CS pair table to determine the code domain resource of the third resource according to the frequency domain resource of the third resource. For example, when the frequency domain resource of the second resource belongs to the PRB set configured to transmit R16 NR-V control information, the first terminal determines the code domain resource of the third resource according to the second CS pair table. For another example, when the frequency domain resource of the second resource is not configured as a PRB set for transmitting R16 NR-V control information, the first terminal determines the code domain resource of the third resource according to the first CS pair table.
  • Step 1720 the first terminal uses R18 NR-V to send control information on the third resource.
  • the R18 NR-V terminal may use the resources in the first resource pool to receive data, and use the remaining resources in the R16 NR-V control resources to send control information.
  • the resource pool of R18 NR-V contains the same set of time-frequency resources as LTE-V
  • the transmission of R18 NR-V control information can be realized, thereby helping to improve the performance of R18 NR-V. reliability of data transmission.
  • the control information of the R18 NR-V is sent using the remaining resources of the control resources of the R16 NR-V, the utilization efficiency of spectrum can be improved.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a method 2000 for receiving control information provided by this application.
  • the method 2000 can be applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 above, but is not limited thereto.
  • the method 2000 may be executed by the second terminal, or may be executed by a module or unit applied to the second terminal. For the convenience of description, it is collectively referred to as the second terminal hereinafter.
  • the R18 NR-V terminal can use the resources in the first resource pool to send data, and use the control resources in the second resource pool of the R16 NR-V to receive control information.
  • the R18 NR-V can use the remaining resources in the control resources of the R16 NR-V to receive control information.
  • the remaining resources reference may be made to the description in method 1700, which will not be repeated here.
  • Method 2000 may include at least some of the following.
  • Step 2020 the second terminal uses the R18 NR-V to receive control information on the third resource.
  • the manner in which the second terminal determines the third resource from the control resource set is the same as the manner in which the first terminal determines the third resource from the control resource set. Reference may be made to the relevant description of step 1710 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the R18 NR-V terminal can use the resources in the first resource pool to send data, and use the remaining resources in the control resources of the R16 NR-V to receive control information.
  • the resource pool of R18 NR-V contains the same time-frequency resource set as LTE-V
  • the reception of control information of R18 NR-V can be realized, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of R18 NR-V. reliability of data transmission.
  • the efficiency of spectrum utilization can be improved.
  • the apparatus in FIG. 22 or FIG. 23 includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing various functions.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software with reference to the units and method steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed in the present application. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software drives the hardware depends on the specific application scenario and design constraints of the technical solution.
  • FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 are schematic structural diagrams of possible devices provided by the embodiments of the present application. These apparatuses can be used to implement the functions of the terminal in the above method embodiments, and therefore can also realize the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments.
  • the device 2100 includes a transceiver unit 2110 and a processing unit 2120 .
  • the transceiver unit 2110 is used to: acquire first information, and the first information is used to determine resources occupied by transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the processing unit 2120 is configured to: determine the first resource as an available resource according to the first information.
  • the transceiving unit 2110 is further configured to: use the second communication protocol to send control information on the first resource.
  • the transceiving unit 2110 is further configured to: acquire second information, where the second information is used to instruct the first terminal to send the control information.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine that the first resource is an available resource when the candidate resource where the first resource is located does not meet a preset condition, and the preset condition is: The resources occupied by the transmission of the communication protocol overlap, and the signal quality is lower than a first threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when the first terminal performs resource selection for transmitting data, and the candidate resource is the resource selected in the first L consecutive frequency domain units of the time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: when none of the candidate resources included in the first time unit where the first resource is located satisfies a preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, The preset condition is: overlapping with resources occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than a first threshold; wherein, the candidate The selected resources are candidate resources when the first terminal selects resources for transmitting data, and the candidate resources are L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: when the candidate resource where the first resource is located does not satisfy a preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: It overlaps with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than the second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when the first terminal performs resource selection for transmission control information, and the candidate resource are L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: when none of the candidate resources included in the first time unit where the first resource is located satisfies a preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, The preset condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than a second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is selected when performing resource selection for the transmission control information of the first terminal Candidate resources, where the candidate resources are L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels in the first time slot.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels of P symbols in the first time slot, where P is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second threshold comes from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the second threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: when the first resource does not meet a preset condition, the first terminal determines that the first resource is an available resource, and the preset condition is: The resources occupied by the transmission of a communication protocol overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the third threshold.
  • the third threshold comes from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the third threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the signal quality is characterized by at least one of the following information: RSRP, RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the first resource is not used for data transmission.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following information: SCI, or a signal quality measurement value corresponding to the SCI, where the SCI includes resource indication information and/or A resource reservation field for transmissions of the first communication protocol.
  • the resource pools of the first communication protocol and the second communication protocol use the same time-frequency resource.
  • control information includes at least one of the following: HARQ information, CSI feedback information, or resource conflict indication information.
  • control information is ACK information fed back to the second terminal when the first terminal successfully decodes the first data from the second terminal; or, the control information is that the first terminal does not have NACK information fed back to the second terminal when the first data from the second terminal is successfully decoded.
  • the transceiver unit 2110 is used to: acquire first information, where the first information is used to indicate resources occupied by transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the processing unit 2120 is configured to: according to the first information, determine that the first resource is an available resource, and the first resource is a resource for transmitting control information of the second communication protocol; and determine the second resource according to the first resource.
  • a resource, the second resource is a resource used to transmit the first data in the second communication protocol.
  • the transceiving unit 2110 is further configured to: use the second communication protocol to send the first data to the first terminal on the second resource.
  • the transceiver unit 2110 is further configured to: send second information to the first terminal, where the second information is used to instruct receiving control information sent by the first terminal, where the control information includes at least one of the following: HARQ information, CSI feedback information, or resource conflict indication information.
  • the second resource corresponding to the first resource is a resource in a first candidate resource set
  • the first candidate resource set is a candidate resource set when the second terminal selects resources for transmitting data.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine a second candidate resource set, where the second candidate resource set is a candidate resource set when the second terminal performs resource selection for transmitting data; according to the first resource, The second resource is determined from the second set of candidate resources.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine that the first resource is an available resource when the candidate resource where the first resource is located does not meet a preset condition, and the preset condition is: The resources occupied by the transmission of the communication protocol overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the first threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when the second terminal performs resource selection for transmitting data, and the candidate resource is the resource selected in the first L consecutive frequency domain units of the time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine that the first resource is an available resource when none of the candidate resources included in the first time unit where the first resource is located satisfies a preset condition, and the preset condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than the first threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when the second terminal performs resource selection for transmitting data, and the The candidate resources are L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine that the first resource is an available resource when the candidate resource where the first resource is located does not meet a preset condition, and the preset condition is: The resources occupied by the transmission of the communication protocol overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when performing resource selection for the transmission control information, and the candidate resource is consecutive L in the first time unit A frequency domain unit, L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine that the first resource is an available resource when none of the candidate resources included in the first time unit where the first resource is located satisfies a preset condition, and the preset condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than the second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when performing resource selection for the transmission control information, and the candidate resource is the first L consecutive frequency domain units of a time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels in the first time slot.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels of P symbols in the first time slot, where P is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second threshold comes from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the second threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine that the first resource is an available resource when the first resource does not meet a preset condition, and the preset condition is: transmission with the first communication protocol The occupied resources overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the third threshold.
  • the third threshold comes from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the third threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the signal quality is characterized by at least one of the following information: RSRP, RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the first resource is not used for data transmission.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following information: SCI, or a signal quality measurement value corresponding to the SCI, where the SCI includes resource indication information and/or A resource reservation field for transmissions of the first communication protocol.
  • the first communication protocol and the second communication protocol use the same set of time-frequency resources.
  • the transceiver unit 2110 is used to: use the second communication protocol to send the first data on the second resource; Second information corresponding to the data, where the second information is used to instruct the first terminal to send control information; first information is acquired, where the first information is used to indicate resources occupied by transmission of the first communication protocol.
  • the processing unit 2120 is configured to: according to the first information, determine that the first resource is an available resource.
  • the transceiving unit 2110 is further configured to: use the second communication protocol to receive the control information on the first resource.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine that the first resource is an available resource when the candidate resource where the first resource is located does not meet a preset condition, and the preset condition is: The resources occupied by the transmission of the communication protocol overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the first threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when the second terminal performs resource selection for transmitting data, and the candidate resource is the resource selected in the first L consecutive frequency domain units of the time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine that the first resource is an available resource when none of the candidate resources included in the first time unit where the first resource is located satisfies a preset condition, and the preset condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than the first threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when the second terminal performs resource selection for transmitting data, and the The candidate resources are L consecutive frequency domain units in the first time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine that the first resource is an available resource when the candidate resource where the first resource is located does not meet a preset condition, and the preset condition is: The resources occupied by the transmission of the communication protocol overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when performing resource selection for the transmission control information, and the candidate resource is consecutive L in the first time unit A frequency domain unit, L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine that the first resource is an available resource when none of the candidate resources included in the first time unit where the first resource is located satisfies a preset condition, and the preset condition is: overlapping with the resource occupied by the transmission of the first communication protocol, and the signal quality is lower than the second threshold; wherein, the candidate resource is a candidate resource when performing resource selection for the transmission control information, and the candidate resource is the first L consecutive frequency domain units of a time unit, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels in the first time slot.
  • the candidate resources are consecutive L subchannels of P symbols in the first time slot, where P is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second threshold comes from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the second threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine that the first resource is an available resource when the first resource does not meet a preset condition, and the preset condition is: transmission with the first communication protocol The occupied resources overlap, and the signal quality is lower than the third threshold.
  • the third threshold comes from an independently configured threshold table or threshold set; or, the third threshold is an absolute threshold.
  • the signal quality is characterized by at least one of the following information: RSRP, RSSI, SNR, or SINR.
  • the first resource is not used for data transmission.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following information: SCI, or a signal quality measurement value corresponding to the SCI, where the SCI includes resource indication information and/or A resource reservation field for transmissions of the first communication protocol.
  • the first communication protocol and the second communication protocol use the same set of time-frequency resources.
  • the processing unit 2120 is used to: determine the third resource from the set of control resources.
  • the transceiving unit 2110 is configured to: use the second communication protocol to send control information on the third resource.
  • the first resource set in the control resource set is configured to transmit control information of the third communication protocol, and the third resource is different from the resources in the first resource set.
  • the third resource is frequency-division multiplexed and/or code-division multiplexed with the resources in the first resource set.
  • the transceiving unit 2110 is further configured to: receive data on the fourth resource.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine the time-domain resource of the third resource according to the fourth resource and the first mapping relationship; wherein the first mapping relationship includes the first physical time slot and the second physical time slot
  • the mapping relationship of slots, the first physical time slot is the last physical time slot included in the fourth resource, and the second physical time slot is the first physical time slot that satisfies the first time interval with the first physical time slot.
  • the first time interval is preconfigured, predefined, or configured by the base station.
  • the transceiving unit 2110 is further configured to: receive data on the fourth resource.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine the frequency domain resource of the third resource according to the fourth resource and the second mapping relationship; wherein the second mapping relationship includes the frequency domain resource of the fourth resource and A mapping relationship of frequency domain resources of the third resource.
  • the third resource is frequency division multiplexed with the resources in the first resource set.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine the code domain resource of the third resource according to the first CS pair table, where the first CS pair table is the CS pair table of the third communication protocol.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine the code domain resource of the third resource according to the second cyclic offset CS pair table; wherein, the second CS pair table and the first CS pair table of the third communication protocol A CS pair table is different.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: when determining that the third resource is frequency division multiplexed with resources in the first resource set, determine the code domain of the third resource according to the first CS pair table Resources; when it is determined that the third resource is code-division multiplexed with the resources in the first resource set, according to the second CS pair table, determine the code domain resource of the third resource; wherein, the second CS The pair table is different from the first CS pair table of the third communication protocol.
  • the CS pairs corresponding to the first CS pair number in the second CS pair table are different from the CS pairs corresponding to the first CS pair number in the first CS pair table.
  • the second CS pair table includes at least one entry in the following tables:
  • the second resource set and the first resource set are configured independently, the resources in the second resource set are used to transmit control information of the second communication protocol, and the third resource belongs to the second Collection of resources.
  • control information includes at least one of the following: HARQ information, CSI feedback information, or resource conflict indication information.
  • the processing unit 2120 is used to: determine the third resource from the set of control resources.
  • the transceiver unit 2110 is configured to: use the second communication protocol to receive control information on the third resource.
  • the first resource set in the control resource set is configured to transmit control information of the third communication protocol, and the third resource is different from the resources in the first resource set.
  • the third resource is frequency-division multiplexed and/or code-division multiplexed with the resources in the first resource set.
  • the transceiving unit 2110 is further configured to: send data on the fourth resource.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine the time-domain resource of the third resource according to the fourth resource and the first mapping relationship; wherein the first mapping relationship includes the first physical time slot and the second physical time slot
  • the mapping relationship of slots, the first physical time slot is the last physical time slot included in the fourth resource, and the second physical time slot is the first physical time slot that satisfies the first time interval with the first physical time slot.
  • the first time interval is preconfigured, predefined, or configured by the base station.
  • the transceiving unit 2110 is further configured to: send data on the fourth resource.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine the frequency domain resource of the third resource according to the fourth resource and the second mapping relationship; wherein the second mapping relationship includes the frequency domain resource of the fourth resource and A mapping relationship of frequency domain resources of the third resource.
  • the third resource is frequency division multiplexed with resources in the first resource set
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine the code field of the third resource according to the first cyclic offset CS pair table A resource, wherein the first CS pair table is a CS pair table of the third communication protocol.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: determine the code domain resource of the third resource according to the second cyclic offset CS pair table; wherein, the second CS pair table and the first CS pair table of the third communication protocol A CS pair table is different.
  • the processing unit 2120 is specifically configured to: when determining that the third resource is frequency division multiplexed with resources in the first resource set, determine the code domain of the third resource according to the first CS pair table resources; when determining the third resource When the source is code-division multiplexed with the resource in the first resource set, the code domain resource of the third resource is determined according to the second CS pair table; wherein, the second CS pair table and the first CS pair table The first CS pair tables of the three communication protocols are different.
  • the CS pairs corresponding to the first CS pair number in the second CS pair table are different from the CS pairs corresponding to the first CS pair number in the first CS pair table.
  • the second CS pair table includes at least one entry in the following tables:
  • the second resource set and the first resource set are configured independently, the resources in the second resource set are used to transmit control information of the second communication protocol, and the third resource belongs to the second Collection of resources.
  • control information includes at least one of the following: HARQ information, CSI feedback information, or resource conflict indication information.
  • transceiver unit 2110 For a more detailed description of the transceiver unit 2110 and the processing unit 2120, reference may be made to relevant descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, and no further description is given here.
  • the device 2200 includes a processor 2210 and an interface circuit 2220 .
  • the processor 2210 and the interface circuit 2220 are coupled to each other.
  • the interface circuit 2220 may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
  • the device 2200 may further include a memory 2230 for storing instructions executed by the processor 2210 or storing input data required by the processor 2210 to execute the instructions or storing data generated after the processor 2210 executes the instructions.
  • the processor 2210 is used to implement the functions of the processing unit 2120 described above
  • the interface circuit 2220 is configured to implement the functions of the transceiver unit 2110 described above.
  • the chip When the device 2200 is a chip applied to the first terminal, the chip implements the functions of the first terminal in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the chip receives information from other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the first terminal, and the information is sent to the first terminal by other devices; or, the chip sends information to other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the first terminal. )send Information, the information is sent by the first terminal to other devices.
  • the chip When the device 2200 is a chip applied to the second terminal, the chip implements the functions of the second terminal in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the chip receives information from other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the second terminal, and the information is sent to the second terminal by other devices; or, the chip sends information to other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the second terminal. ) to send information, which is sent by the second terminal to other devices.
  • the present application also provides a communication device, including a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions and/or data, and the processor is used to execute the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, or read the memory stored in the memory. data to execute the methods in the above method embodiments.
  • a communication device including a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions and/or data, and the processor is used to execute the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, or read the memory stored in the memory. data to execute the methods in the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device includes memory.
  • the memory is integrated with the processor, or is set separately.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, on which computer instructions for implementing the methods executed by the first terminal in the foregoing method embodiments are stored.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, including instructions, and when the instructions are executed by a computer, the methods executed by the first terminal in the foregoing method embodiments are implemented.
  • the present application also provides a communication system, where the communication system includes the first terminal and/or the second terminal in each of the above embodiments.
  • processor in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and may also be other general processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processor, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • a general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor, or any conventional processor.
  • the method steps in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by means of hardware, or may be implemented by means of a processor executing software instructions.
  • Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and software modules can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only Memory, registers, hard disk, removable hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor such the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium.
  • the storage medium may also be a component of the processor.
  • the processor and storage medium can be located in the ASIC. Additionally, the ASIC may be located in the first terminal and/or in the second terminal. Certainly, the processor and the storage medium may also exist in the first terminal and/or the second terminal as discrete components.
  • all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product comprises one or more computer programs or instructions. When the computer program or instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are executed in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer program or instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer program or instructions may be downloaded from a website, computer, A server or data center transmits to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired or wireless means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrating one or more available media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium, such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, or a magnetic tape; it may also be an optical medium, such as a digital video disk; or it may be a semiconductor medium, such as a solid state disk.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种控制信息的发送方法和通信装置，在该方法中，终端可以根据第一信息确定第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，进而根据第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源确定第一资源为可用资源，并使用第二通信协议在第一资源上传输控制信息。这样可以避免使用第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，传输第二通信协议的控制信息，从而有助于避免第一通信协议的传输和第二通信协议的传输发生资源冲突。

Description

一种控制信息的发送方法和通信装置
本申请要求于2022年01月30日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202210114635.9、申请名称为“一种控制信息的发送方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，并且具体地，涉及一种控制信息的发送方法和通信装置。
背景技术
在第一通信协议和第二通信协议使用相同的时频资源的场景下，存在使用第二通信协议的进行通信的终端不明确第一通信协议所占用的资源的情况。在此情况下，第一终端在使用第二通信协议进行通信时易和第一通信协议所占用的资源发生资源冲突。
发明内容
本申请提供了一种控制信息的发送方法和通信装置，有助于避免资源冲突。
第一方面，提供了一种控制信息的发送方法，所述方法可以由第一终端执行，也可以由应用于第一终端的模块或单元执行，为了描述方便，下文统一称为第一终端。
所述方法包括：第一终端获取第一信息，所述第一信息用于确定第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源；所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源；所述第一终端使用第二通信协议在所述第一资源上发送控制信息。
可选地，第一通信协议为长期演进-车(long term evolution-vehicle，LTE-V)，第二通信协议为R18新无线-车(new radio-vehicle，NR-V)。
可选地，第一通信协议为长期演进-侧行通信(long term evolution-vehicle，LTE-Sidelink)，第二通信协议为R18新无线-侧行通信(new radio-vehicle，NR-Sidelink)。
可选地，第二通信协议可以为任意一个版本的新无线-车(new radio-vehicle，NR-V)。例如，第二通信协议包括R18 NR-V、R19 NR-V、R20 NR-V等，这里不予限制。
第一信息用于确定第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，也可以替换为，第一信息用于指示终端使用第一通信协议所占用的资源。可选地，终端使用第一通信协议所占用的资源可以包括第一终端使用第一通信协议所占用的资源和/或第一终端以外的终端(例如第二终端)使用第一通信协议所占用的资源。
“所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源；所述第一终端使用第二通信协议在所述第一资源上发送控制信息”也可以替换为“所述第一终端根据所述第一信息使用第二通信协议在第一资源上发送控制信息”。
在上述技术方案中，第一终端可以根据第一信息确定第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，进而根据第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源确定第一资源为可用资源，并使用第二通 信协议在第一资源上发送控制信息。这样，通过上述技术方案，第一终端在确定传输第二通信协议的控制信息的可用资源时考虑第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，可以避免使用第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源传输第二通信协议的控制信息，从而有助于避免第一通信协议的传输和第二通信协议的传输发生资源冲突。
此外，通过上述技术方案可以实现第二通信协议的控制信息的发送，从而有助于提高第二通信协议的数据的传输的可靠性。
需要说明的是，在第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源时，除了第一信息外，也可以使用用于指示第二通信协议的传输所占用的资源的资源指示信息。即第一终端根据第一信息和来自第二通信协议的传输的资源指示信息来确定第一资源为可用资源或不可用资源。本申请中不予限制。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第一终端获取第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端发送所述控制信息，所述控制信息包括以下至少一项：混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request，HARQ)信息、信道状态信息(channel state information，CSI)反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。
可选地，第二信息承载于第二级侧行控制信息(sidelink control information，SCI)中。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的HARQ使能信息，控制信息为HARQ信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括HARQ使能信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送该数据对应的HARQ信息，即控制信息为HARQ信息。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的CSI触发信息，控制信息为CSI反馈信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括CSI触发信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送CSI反馈信息，即控制信息为CSI反馈信息。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的资源冲突指示信息的触发信息，控制信息为资源冲突指示信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括资源冲突指示信息的触发信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送资源冲突指示信息，即控制信息为资源冲突指示信息。
在上述技术方案中，在第一终端获取到用于指示第一终端发送控制信息的第二信息时，第一终端使用第二通信协议在第一资源上发送控制信息，这样有助于避免资源浪费。当控制信息为HARQ信息时，使用HARQ反馈可以提高数据传输的可靠性。当控制信息为CSI反馈信息时，使用CSI反馈可以提高链路自适应(例如，帮助触发CSI反馈的第二终端更好地选择调制与编码策略(modulation and coding scheme，MCS))，提高系统效率。当控制信息为资源冲突指示信息时，使用资源冲突指示信息可以提高数据传输的可靠性。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候选资源是所述第一终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的可以用于传输数据的候选资源为可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的可以用于传输数据的候选资源为不可用资源 时，第一终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用接收信号强度指示信息(received signal strength indicator，RSSI)、信号噪声比(signal noise ratio，SNR)、或信号噪声干扰比(signal to interference plus noise ratio，SINR)中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在为数据进行资源选择时，终端通过检测其他设备所占用的资源的能量，来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的数据传输。上述方法在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，也通过检测其他设备所占用的资源的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用参考信号(reference signal，RS)测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候选资源是所述第一终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输数据的候选资源均为可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输数据的候选资源中一个或多个候选资源为不可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，也通过检测其他设备所占用的资源的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。进一步，在判断某个候选资源可用时，假设终端在该候选资源所包含的第一资源上发送控制信息时，由于第一时间单元包括的其他候选资源有的不可用，这说明第一通信协议模块在第一时间单元有传输，此时终端可能出现第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。该方法在第一时间单元包括的候选资源均为低干扰资源时再使用，此时可以有效避免第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用参考信号RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一终端根据所 述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是所述第一终端为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源为可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源为不可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，通过检测其他设备在第一时间单元的第一通信协议的传输的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息的传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用参考信号RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是为所述第一终端传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源均为可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源中一个或多个候选资源为不可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，通过检测其他设备在第一时间单元的第一通信协议的传输的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息的传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。由于第一时间单元包括的候选资源有的可用，有的不可用，这说明第一通信协议模块在第一时间单元有传输，此时终端可能出现第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。该方法在第一时间单元包括的候选资源均为低干扰资源时再使用，此时可以有效避免第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。当上述能量是至少一个 符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的连续L个子信道。
在上述技术方案中，定义了候选资源的大小，保证了本申请的技术方案的完整性。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的P个符号的连续L个子信道，P为大于或者等于1的整数。
在上述技术方案中，定义了发送控制信息的候选资源的时域粒度，可以为1个或2个符号(物理侧行反馈信道(physical sidelink feedback channel，PSFCH)的发送符号，PSFCH的发送符号和PSFCH的发送符号的复制符号)。保证了本申请的技术方案的完整性。另外，发送控制信息的候选资源的时域粒度可以和发送数据的候选资源的时域粒度不同，保证了干扰判断程度的准确性。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述频域资源可以为一个或多个物理资源块(physical resource block，PRB)。
在上述技术方案中，定义了候选资源的大小，保证了本申请的技术方案的完整性。PRB的粒度相较于子信道更细，可以更准备的判断候选资源是否有干扰。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第二阈值是绝对阈值。
其中，第二阈值可以根据第一终端待发送的HARQ信息的优先级值和与该候选资源重叠的第一通信协议的传输的资源相应的优先级值确定。可选地，第二阈值可以与MCS、信道忙碌比(channel busy ratio，CBR)中的至少一个相关联。
在上述技术方案中，第二阈值用于判断发送控制信息的候选资源的干扰程度。单独为控制信息的候选资源设置阈值可以使得判断发送控制信息的候选资源的干扰程度时更加准确，同时也给与了基站配置上的灵活性。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第三阈值。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
换句话说，第一终端直接根据预设条件判断第一资源是否为可用资源。当第一资源不按满足上述预设条件时第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源满足上述预设条件时，第一终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
在上述技术方案中，上述方法在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，通过检测其他设备在第一时间单元的第一通信协议的传输的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息的传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或 者SINR)，相较于适用RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第三阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第三阈值是绝对阈值。
在上述技术方案中，第三阈值用于判断发送控制信息的候选资源的干扰程度。单独为控制信息的第一资源设置阈值可以使得判断发送控制信息的第一资源的干扰程度时更加准确，同时也给与了基站配置上的灵活性。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述信号质量通过以下信息中的至少一个表征：参考信号接收功率(reference signal received power，RSRP)、RSSI、SNR、或SINR。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一资源不用于传输数据。
第一资源不用于传输数据，可以理解为，第一终端在进行数据速率匹配时不在第一资源上做速率匹配。
由于收发双方的终端对第一通信协议所占用的资源的感知结果不一定相同，这样有可能会出现收发双方的终端对于第一资源是否可用的判定结果不同的情况，会导致收发冲突(例如，接收数据和发送HARQ信息冲突、或者接收HARQ信息和发送数据冲突)。第一资源不用于传输数据则可以避免收发冲突。
可选地，所述第一资源所在时域单元不用于传输数据。这样可以避免收发双方的终端发生收发冲突。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一信息包括以下信息中的至少一项：SCI、或所述SCI对应的信号质量测量值，所述SCI包括所述第一通信协议的传输的资源指示信息和/或所述第一通信协议的传输的资源预留字段。
可选地，所述SCI也可以理解为侧行分配(sidelink assignment，SA)。
可选地，第一信息包括PSCCH解码信息和RSRP测量信息。
可选地，第一信息包括PSCCH解码信息和能量测量值。
可选地，第一信息包括在一个时域资源集合内的PSCCH解码信息和RSRP测量信息。其中，该时域资源集合的位置的确定方式包括以下至少一个：预定义、预配置、第一终端的第一通信协议模块传输给第二通信协议模块的、第二通信协议模块确定并发送给第一通信协议模块的。该时域资源集合的位置的指示方式包括下述各项的至少一个：时域资源集合的起始位置、时域资源集合的结束位置、时域资源集合的长度、时域资源集合的结束位置为第二通信协议模块接收到时域资源集合的指示信息的位置、时域资源集合的结束位置为第二通信协议模块接收到时域资源集合的指示信息的位置往前一个时间间隔。该时间间隔是第一通信协议模块到第二通信协议模块的传输(发送或透传)时间。时域资源集合的起始位置的参考点是系统帧号，比如直接帧号(direct frame number，DFN)为0的位置，或者是系统帧号(system frame number，SFN)为0的位置。时间资源集合的起始位置由该参考点和一个时间偏移值确定。
可选地，时域资源集合是连续的，例如时域资源集合是一个时间窗。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一通信协议和 所述第二通信协议的资源池使用相同的时频资源。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述控制信息为所述第一终端成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的确认(acknowledgement，ACK)信息；或者，所述控制信息为所述第一终端没有成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的否认(negative acknowledgement，NACK)信息。
可选地，所述控制信息可以是组播反馈选项1的ACK或NACK，或者是组播反馈选项2的NACK only(只在所述第一终端没有成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的NACK信息)，或者是单播的ACK或NACK。
第二方面，提供了一种数据的发送方法，所述方法可以由第二终端执行，也可以由应用于第二终端的模块或单元执行，为了描述方便，下文统一称为第二终端。
所述方法包括：第二终端获取第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源；所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，所述第一资源为第二通信协议的用于传输控制信息的资源；所述第二终端根据所述第一资源确定第二资源，所述第二资源为第二通信协议的用于传输第一数据的资源；所述第二终端使用所述第二通信协议在所述第二资源上向第一终端发送所述第一数据。
可选地，第一通信协议为LTE-V，第二通信协议为R18 NR-V。
可选地，第一通信协议为LTE-Sidelink，第二通信协议为R18 NR-Sidelink。
可选地，第二通信协议可以为任意一个版本的NR-V。例如，第二通信协议包括R18 NR-V、R19 NR-V、R20 NR-V等，这里不予限制。
第一信息用于确定第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，也可以替换为，第一信息用于指示终端使用第一通信协议所占用的资源。可选地，终端使用第一通信协议所占用的资源可以包括第二终端使用第一通信协议所占用的资源和/或第二终端以外的终端(例如第一终端)使用第一通信协议所占用的资源。
在上述技术方案中，第二终端可以根据第一信息确定第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，进而根据第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源确定第一资源为可用资源，并根据第一资源确定传输第二通信协议的数据的第二资源。换句话说，第二终端确定用于传输第二通信协议的数据的第二资源同时满足：第二资源为可用资源，以及与第二资源对应的用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息的资源为可用资源。这样，通过上述技术方案，第二终端在确定传输第二通信协议的控制信息的可用资源时考虑第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，可以避免使用第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源传输第二通信协议的控制信息，从而有助于避免第一通信协议的传输和第二通信协议的传输发生资源冲突。
此外，第二资源同时满足：第二资源为可用资源，以及与第二资源对应的用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息的资源为可用资源，从而有助于提高第二通信协议的数据的传输的可靠性。
需要说明的是，在第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源时，除了第一信息外，也可以使用用于指示第二通信协议的传输所占用的资源的资源指示信息。即第二终端根据第一信息和来自第二通信协议的传输的资源指示信息来确定第一资源为可用资源或不可用资源。本申请中不予限制。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第二终端向所述第一终端发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端发送控制信息，所述控制信息包括以下至少一项：HARQ信息、CSI反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。例如，当第二终端根据第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源时，第二终端向第一终端发送第二信息。
可选地，第二信息承载于第二级SCI中。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的HARQ使能信息，控制信息为HARQ信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括HARQ使能信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送该数据对应的HARQ信息，即控制信息为HARQ信息。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的CSI触发信息，控制信息为CSI反馈信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括CSI触发信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送CSI反馈信息，即控制信息为CSI反馈信息。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的资源冲突指示信息的触发信息，控制信息为资源冲突指示信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括资源冲突指示信息的触发信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送资源冲突指示信息，即控制信息为资源冲突指示信息。
示例性地，HARQ使能信息，CSI触发信息在第二级SCI中指示。
示例性地，资源冲突指示信息的触发信息在第一级SCI中指示。资源冲突指示信息的触发信息可以是第一级SCI中的时域资源指示和频域资源指示信息。
在上述技术方案中，第二终端指示第一终端发送控制信息，这样可以使得第一终端在接收到第二终端的指示时才使用第二通信协议在第一资源上发送控制信息，这样有助于避免资源浪费。当控制信息为CSI反馈信息时，使用CSI反馈可以提高链路自适应(例如，帮助触发CSI反馈的第二终端更好地选择MCS)，提高系统效率。当控制信息为资源冲突指示信息时，使用资源冲突指示信息可以提高数据传输的可靠性。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一资源对应的所述第二资源为第一候选资源集合中的资源，所述第一候选资源集合是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源集合。
换一种描述方式，第二终端根据第一资源，确定第一候选资源集合，该第一候选资源集合是第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源集合；第二终端从该第一候选资源集合中确定第二资源。
即第二终端所确定的第一候选资源集合满足：第一候选资源集合中的资源为可用资源，该资源对应的传输控制信息的资源也为可用资源。
在上述技术方案中，第二资源同时满足：第二资源为可用资源，以及与第二资源对应的用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息的资源为可用资源，这样从而有助于提高第二通信协议的数据的传输的可靠性。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端根据所述第一资源，确定第二资源，包括：所述第二终端确定第二候选资源集合，所述第二候选资源集合是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源集合；所述第二终端根据所述第一资源，从所述第二候选资源集合中确定所述第二资源。
在上述技术方案中，第二资源同时满足：第二资源为可用资源，以及与第二资源对应 的用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息的资源为可用资源，这样从而有助于提高第二通信协议的数据的传输的可靠性。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，所述第二终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候选资源是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的可以用于传输数据的候选资源为可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的可以用于传输数据的候选资源为不可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在为数据进行资源选择时，终端通过检测其他设备所占用的资源的能量，来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的数据传输。上述方法在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，也通过检测其他设备所占用的资源的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，所述第二终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候选资源是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输数据的候选资源均为可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输数据的候选资源中一个或多个候选资源为不可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，也通过检测其他设备所占用的资源的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。进一步，在判断某个 候选资源可用时，假设终端在该候选资源所包含的第一资源上发送控制信息时，由于第一时间单元包括的其他候选资源有的不可用，这说明第一通信协议模块在第一时间单元有传输，此时终端可能出现第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。该方法在第一时间单元包括的候选资源均为低干扰资源时再使用，此时可以有效避免第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用参考信号RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，所述第二终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源为可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源为不可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，通过检测其他设备在第一时间单元的第一通信协议的传输的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息的传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用参考信号RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，所述第二终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源均为可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源中一个或多个候选资源为不可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，通过检测其他设备在第一时间单元的第一通信协议的传输的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息的传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。由于第一时间单元包括的候选资源有的可用，有的不可用，这说明第一通信协议模块在第一时间单元有传输，此时终端可能出现第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。该方法在第一时间单元包括的候选资源均为低干扰资源时再使用，此时可以有效避免第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的连续L个子信道。
在上述技术方案中，定义了候选资源的大小，保证了本申请的技术方案的完整性。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的P个符号的连续L个子信道，P为大于或者等于1的整数。
在上述技术方案中，定义了发送控制信息的候选资源的时域粒度，可以为1个或2个符号(PSFCH的发送符号，PSFCH的发送符号和PSFCH的发送符号的复制符号)。保证了本申请的技术方案的完整性。另外，发送控制信息的候选资源的时域粒度可以和发送数据的候选资源的时域粒度不同，保证了干扰判断程度的准确性。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述频域资源可以为一个或多个PRB。
在上述技术方案中，定义了候选资源的大小，保证了本申请的技术方案的完整性。PRB的粒度相较于子信道更细，可以更准备的判断候选资源是否有干扰。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第二阈值是绝对阈值。
其中，第二阈值可以根据第一终端待发送的HARQ信息的优先级值和与该候选资源重叠的LTE-V的传输的资源相应的优先级值确定。可选地，第二阈值可以与MCS、CBR中的至少一个相关联。
在上述技术方案中，第二阈值用于判断发送控制信息的候选资源的干扰程度。单独为控制信息的候选资源设置阈值可以使得判断发送控制信息的候选资源的干扰程度时更加准确，同时也给与了基站配置上的灵活性。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源不满足预设条件时，所述第二终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第三阈值。
换句话说，第二终端直接根据预设条件判断第一资源是否为可用资源。当第一资源不按满足上述预设条件时第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源满足上述预设条件时，第一终端确定第二资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，上述方法在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，通过检测其他设备在第一时间单元的第一通信协议的传输的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息的传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第三阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第三阈值是绝对阈值。
在上述技术方案中，第三阈值用于判断发送控制信息的候选资源的干扰程度。单独为控制信息的第一资源设置阈值可以使得判断发送控制信息的第一资源的干扰程度时更加准确，同时也给与了基站配置上的灵活性。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述信号质量通过以下信息中的至少一个表征：RSRP、RSSI、SNR、或SINR。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一资源不用于传输数据。
第一资源不用于传输数据，可以理解为，第二终端在进行数据速率匹配时不在第一资源上做速率匹配。
由于收发双方的终端对第一通信协议所占用的资源的感知结果不一定相同，这样有可能会出现收发双方的终端对于第一资源是否可用的判定结果不同的情况，会导致收发冲突(例如，接收数据和发送HARQ信息冲突、或者接收HARQ信息和发送数据冲突)。第一资源不用于传输数据则可以避免收发冲突。
可选地，所述第一资源所在时域单元不用于传输数据。这样可以避免收发双方的终端发生收发冲突。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一信息包括以下信息中的至少一项：SCI、或所述SCI对应的信号质量测量值，所述SCI包括所述第一通信协议的传输的资源指示信息和/或所述第一通信协议的传输的资源预留字段。
可选地，所述SCI也可以理解为SA。
可选地，第一信息包括PSCCH解码信息和RSRP测量信息。
可选地，第一信息包括PSCCH解码信息和能量测量值。
可选地，第一信息包括在一个时域资源集合内的PSCCH解码信息和RSRP测量信息。其中，该时域资源集合的位置的确定方式包括以下至少一个：预定义、预配置、第一终端的第一通信协议模块传输给第二通信协议模块的、第二通信协议模块确定并发送给第一通信协议模块的。该时域资源集合的位置的指示方式包括下述各项的至少一个：时域资源集合的起始位置、时域资源集合的结束位置、时域资源集合的长度、时域资源集合的结束位置为第二通信协议模块接收到时域资源集合的指示信息的位置、时域资源集合的结束位置为第二通信协议模块接收到时域资源集合的指示信息的位置往前一个时间间隔。该时间间 隔是第一通信协议模块到第二通信协议模块的传输(发送或透传)时间。时域资源集合的起始位置的参考点是系统帧号，比如DFN为0的位置，或者是SFN为0的位置。时间资源集合的起始位置由该参考点和一个时间偏移值确定。
可选地，时域资源集合是连续的，例如时域资源集合是一个时间窗。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一通信协议和所述第二通信协议使用相同的时频资源集合。
结合第二方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述控制信息为所述第一终端成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的ACK信息；或者，所述控制信息为所述第一终端没有成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的NACK信息。
可选地，所述控制信息可以是组播反馈选项1的ACK或NACK，或者是组播反馈选项2的NACK only(只在所述第一终端没有成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的NACK信息)，或者是单播的ACK或NACK。
第三方面，提供了一种控制信息的接收方法，所述方法可以由第二终端执行，也可以由应用于第二终端的模块或单元执行，为了描述方便，下文统一称为第二终端。
所述方法包括：第二终端使用第二通信协议在第二资源上向第一终端发送第一数据；所述第二终端向所述第一终端发送与所述第一数据对应的第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端发送控制信息；所述第二终端获取第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源；所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源；所述第二终端使用所述第二通信协议在所述第一资源上接收所述控制信息。
可选地，第一通信协议为LTE-V，第二通信协议为R18 NR-V。
可选地，第一通信协议为LTE-Sidelink，第二通信协议为R18 NR-Sidelink。
可选地，第二通信协议可以为任意一个版本的NR-V。例如，第二通信协议包括R18 NR-V、R19 NR-V、R20 NR-V等，这里不予限制。
可选地，所述控制信息包括以下至少一项：HARQ信息、CSI反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。
第一数据对应的第二信息，可以理解为，与第一数据同时发送的第二信息、第二信息用于调度第一数据、第二信息用于触发第一终端发送与第一数据相关的控制信息(例如，HARQ信息、资源冲突指示信息、CSI反馈信息等)。例如，第二信息为调度承载第一数据的PSSCH的PSCCH。
可选地，第二信息承载于第二级SCI中。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的HARQ使能信息，控制信息为HARQ信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括HARQ使能信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送该数据对应的HARQ信息，即控制信息为HARQ信息。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的CSI触发信息，控制信息为CSI反馈信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括CSI触发信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送CSI反馈信息，即控制信息为CSI反馈信息。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的资源冲突指示信息的触发信息，控制信息为资源冲突指示信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括资源冲突指 示信息的触发信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送资源冲突指示信息，即控制信息为资源冲突指示信息。
示例性地，HARQ使能信息，CSI触发信息在第二级SCI中指示。
示例性地，资源冲突指示信息的触发信息在第一级SCI中指示。资源冲突指示信息的触发信息可以是第一级SCI中的时域资源指示和频域资源指示信息。
第一信息用于确定第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，也可以替换为，第一信息用于指示终端使用第一通信协议所占用的资源。可选地，终端使用第一通信协议所占用的资源可以包括第二终端使用第一通信协议所占用的资源和/或第二终端以外的终端(例如第一终端)使用第一通信协议所占用的资源。
在上述技术方案中，第二终端指示第一终端向第二终端发送控制信息，根据第一信息确定第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，并在根据第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源确定第一资源为可用资源时，在第一资源上接收第二通信协议的控制信息。这样，通过上述技术方案，第二终端在确定传输第二通信协议的控制信息的可用资源时考虑第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，可以避免使用第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源传输第二通信协议的控制信息，从而有助于避免第一通信协议的传输和第二通信协议的传输发生资源冲突。
此外，通过上述技术方案可以实现第二通信协议的控制信息的接收，从而有助于提高第二通信协议的数据的传输的可靠性。
此外，第二终端指示第一终端发送控制信息，这样可以使得第一终端在接收到第二终端的指示时才使用第二通信协议在第一资源上发送控制信息，这样有助于避免资源浪费。当控制信息为CSI反馈信息时，使用CSI反馈可以提高链路自适应(例如，帮助触发CSI反馈的第二终端更好地选择MCS)，提高系统效率。当控制信息为资源冲突指示信息时，使用资源冲突指示信息可以提高数据传输的可靠性。
需要说明的是，在第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源时，除了第一信息外，也可以使用用于指示第二通信协议的传输所占用的资源的资源指示信息。即第二终端根据第一信息和来自第二通信协议的传输的资源指示信息来确定第一资源为可用资源或不可用资源。本申请中不予限制。结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，所述第二终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候选资源是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的可以用于传输数据的候选资源为可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的可以用于传输数据的候选资源为不可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在为数据进行资源选择时，终端通过检测其他设备所占用的资源 的能量，来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的数据传输。上述方法在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，也通过检测其他设备所占用的资源的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，所述第二终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候选资源是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输数据的候选资源均为可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输数据的候选资源中一个或多个候选资源为不可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，也通过检测其他设备所占用的资源的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。进一步，在判断某个候选资源可用时，假设终端在该候选资源所包含的第一资源上发送控制信息时，由于第一时间单元包括的其他候选资源有的不可用，这说明第一通信协议模块在第一时间单元有传输，此时终端可能出现第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。该方法在第一时间单元包括的候选资源均为低干扰资源时再使用，此时可以有效避免第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用参考信号RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，所述第二终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源为可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源为不可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，通过检测其他设备在第一时间单元的第一通信协议的传输的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息的传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用参考信号RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，所述第二终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源均为可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源中一个或多个候选资源为不可用资源时，第二终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，通过检测其他设备在第一时间单元的第一通信协议的传输的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息的传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。由于第一时间单元包括的候选资源有的可用，有的不可用，这说明第一通信协议模块在第一时间单元有传输，此时终端可能出现第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。该方法在第一时间单元包括的候选资源均为低干扰资源时再使用，此时可以有效避免第一通信协议模块和第二通信协议模块的收发冲突问题。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的连续L个子信道。
在上述技术方案中，定义了候选资源的大小，保证了本申请的技术方案的完整性。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的P个符号的连续L个子信道，P为大于或者等于1的整数。
在上述技术方案中，定义了发送控制信息的候选资源的时域粒度，可以为1个或2个 符号(PSFCH的发送符号，PSFCH的发送符号和PSFCH的发送符号的复制符号)。保证了本申请的技术方案的完整性。另外，发送控制信息的候选资源的时域粒度可以和发送数据的候选资源的时域粒度不同，保证了干扰判断程度的准确性。
结合第一方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述频域资源可以为一个或多个PRB。
在上述技术方案中，定义了候选资源的大小，保证了本申请的技术方案的完整性。PRB的粒度相较于子信道更细，可以更准备的判断候选资源是否有干扰。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第二阈值是绝对阈值。
其中，第二阈值可以根据第一终端待发送的HARQ信息的优先级值和与该候选资源重叠的LTE-V的传输的资源相应的优先级值确定。可选地，第二阈值可以与MCS、CBR中的至少一个相关联。
在上述技术方案中，第二阈值用于判断发送控制信息的候选资源的干扰程度。单独为控制信息的候选资源设置阈值可以使得判断发送控制信息的候选资源的干扰程度时更加准确，同时也给与了基站配置上的灵活性。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：在所述第一资源不满足预设条件时，所述第二终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第三阈值。
换句话说，第二终端直接根据预设条件判断第一资源是否为可用资源。当第一资源不按满足上述预设条件时第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源满足上述预设条件时，第一终端确定第二资源为不可用资源。
可选地，所述信号质量是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量。
可选地，所述信号质量为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量。
可选地，信号质量可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量，或者是第一时隙上的能量。
可选地，上述能量可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
在上述技术方案中，上述方法在确定第一资源(传输控制信息的资源)是否可用时，通过检测其他设备在第一时间单元的第一通信协议的传输的能量来判断是否会干扰到终端自己的控制信息的传输，保证了控制信息的传输资源的低干扰，进而保证了控制信息的传输的可靠性。当上述能量是至少一个符号或一个时隙上的能量(比如RSSI或者SNR或者SINR)，相较于适用RS测量的能量粒度较粗，可以反映出整个符号或时隙上的信道占用情况。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第三阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第三阈值是绝对阈值。
在上述技术方案中，第三阈值用于判断发送控制信息的候选资源的干扰程度。单独为控制信息的第一资源设置阈值可以使得判断发送控制信息的第一资源的干扰程度时更加准确，同时也给与了基站配置上的灵活性。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述信号质量通过以下信息中的至少一个表征：RSRP、RSSI、SNR、或SINR。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一资源不用于传输数据。
第一资源不用于传输数据，可以理解为，第二终端在进行数据速率匹配时不在第一资源上做速率匹配。
由于收发双方的终端对第一通信协议所占用的资源的感知结果不一定相同，这样有可能会出现收发双方的终端对于第一资源是否可用的判定结果不同的情况，会导致收发冲突(例如，接收数据和发送HARQ信息冲突、或者接收HARQ信息和发送数据冲突)。第一资源不用于传输数据则可以避免收发冲突。
可选地，所述第一资源所在时域单元不用于传输数据。这样可以避免收发双方的终端发生收发冲突。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一信息包括以下信息中的至少一项：SCI、或所述SCI对应的信号质量，所述SCI包括所述第一通信协议的传输的资源指示信息和/或所述第一通信协议的传输的资源预留字段。
可选地，所述SCI也可以理解为SA。
可选地，第一信息包括PSCCH解码信息和RSRP测量信息。
可选地，第一信息包括PSCCH解码信息和能量测量值。
可选地，第一信息包括在一个时域资源集合内的PSCCH解码信息和RSRP测量信息。其中，该时域资源集合的位置的确定方式包括以下至少一个：预定义、预配置、第一终端的第一通信协议模块传输给第二通信协议模块的、第二通信协议模块确定并发送给第一通信协议模块的。该时域资源集合的位置的指示方式包括下述各项的至少一个：时域资源集合的起始位置、时域资源集合的结束位置、时域资源集合的长度、时域资源集合的结束位置为第二通信协议模块接收到时域资源集合的指示信息的位置、时域资源集合的结束位置为第二通信协议模块接收到时域资源集合的指示信息的位置往前一个时间间隔。该时间间隔是第一通信协议模块到第二通信协议模块的传输(发送或透传)时间。时域资源集合的起始位置的参考点是系统帧号，比如DFN为0的位置，或者是SFN为0的位置。时间资源集合的起始位置由该参考点和一个时间偏移值确定。
可选地，时域资源集合是连续的，例如时域资源集合是一个时间窗。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一通信协议和所述第二通信协议使用相同的时频资源集合。
结合第三方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述控制信息为所述第一终端成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的ACK信息；或者，所述控制信息为所述第一终端没有成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的NACK信息。
可选地，所述控制信息可以是组播反馈选项1的ACK或NACK，或者是组播反馈选项2的NACK only(只在所述第一终端没有成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的NACK信息)，或者是单播的ACK或NACK。
第四方面，提供了一种控制信息的发送方法，所述方法可以由第一终端执行，也可以由应用于第一终端的模块或单元执行，为了描述方便，下文统一称为第一终端。
所述方法包括：第一终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源；所述第一终端使用第二通 信协议在所述第三资源上发送控制信息；其中，所述控制资源集合中的第一资源集合被配置为用于传输第三通信协议的控制信息，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源不同。
可选地，第二通信协议为R18 NR-V，第三通信协议为R16 NR-V。
可选地，第二通信协议为R18 NR-V，第三通信协议为R17 NR-V。
可选地，第三通信协议与第二通信协议相同。在此情况下，第一资源集合为被配置用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息的资源的集合。例如，若R18 NR-V的资源池包括两类资源，一类是R18 NR-V专用的时频资源，另一类是R18 NR-V与LTE-V共同使用的时频资源，当第二终端使用R18 NR-V在与LTE-V共同使用的时频资源传输数据时，第二终端可以使用R18 NR-V专用的资源中的剩余资源来传输该数据对应的控制信息，其中剩余资源为R18 NR-V专用的资源中被配置用于传输控制信息但是未被占用的资源。又例如，资源集合1为R18 NR-V和LTE-V共同使用的时频资源，资源集合2为R18 NR-V使用的时频资源，其中，资源集合2包含控制资源集合，资源集合1中的数据对应的控制信息可以在资源集合2中的控制资源集合中的剩余资源来传输。
控制资源集合包括的资源或者说控制资源可以用于传输控制信息，或者说，控制资源集合为由可以用于传输控制信息的资源所构成的资源集合。
在上述技术方案中，第一终端可以使用控制资源集合中的与被配置为用于传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源不同的控制资源来传输第二通信协议的控制信息。这样，通过上述技术方案，可以实现第一终端使用和第一通信协议共同使用的时频资源来传输第二通信协议的数据，使用与被配置为用于传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源不同的控制资源来传输第二通信协议的控制信息，有助于避免第一通信协议的传输和第二通信协议的传输发生资源冲突。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源频分复用和/或码分复用。
可选地，上述控制资源集合为第三通信协议的控制资源集合，即上述控制资源集合为第一资源集合，可以理解为，第二通信协议的控制资源集合与第三通信协议的控制资源集合相同，此时第三资源与第一资源集合中的资源可以频分复用，也可以码分复用，还可以既支持频分复用又支持码分复用。在此情况下，由于第一终端利用第三通信协议的控制资源集合中与被配置为传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源不同的资源来传输第二通信协议的控制信息，因此可以提高频谱的利用效率。
可选地，上述控制资源集合包括第一资源集合和第二资源集合，其中第一资源集合为第三通信协议的控制资源集合，第二资源集合为第二通信协议的控制资源集合。第三资源属于第二资源集合。第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源频分复用。换句话说，第二资源集合与第一资源集合在频域上没有交集。
例如，第一资源集合包括PRB0、PRB1、和PRB2，第二资源集合包括PRB5、PRB6、和PRB7。
可选地，上述控制资源集合包括第一资源集合和第二资源集合。其中第一资源集合为第三通信协议的控制资源集合，第二资源集合为第二通信协议的控制资源集合。第三资源属于第二资源集合。第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源频分复用，或者第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源频域相同、码域不同。
例如，第一资源集合包括PRB0、PRB1、和PRB2，第二资源集合包括PRB2、PRB3、和PRB4。这样PRB2既可以用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息又可以用于传输第三通信协议的控制信息，为了区分，此时第二通信协议的PRB2和第三通信协议的PRB2可以码分复用。第二资源集合中的PRB0和PRB1与第二资源集合中的资源频分复用。
结合第四方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第一终端在第四资源上接收数据；所述第一终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源，包括：所述第一终端根据所述第四资源、以及第一映射关系，确定所述第三资源的时域资源；其中，所述第一映射关系包括第一物理时隙与第二物理时隙的映射关系，所述第一物理时隙为所述第四资源包括的最后一个物理时隙(即第四资源的结束位置所在物理时隙)，所述第二物理时隙为与所述第一物理时隙满足第一时间间隔的第一个包含控制资源的物理时隙，所述第二物理时隙在所述第一物理时隙之后。所述第一时间间隔的单位可以是物理时隙。
可选地，第四资源属于和第一通信协议的传输共同使用的时频资源集合。
这里使用物理时隙是因为第三通信协议的物理侧行共享信道(physical sidelink share channel，PSSCH)到PSFCH的映射关系是根据第三通信协议的资源池内的逻辑时隙确定，而第二通信协议的资源池也有自身的逻辑时隙索引，这会导致第二通信协议的资源池的逻辑时隙的索引和第三通信协议的资源池的逻辑时隙的索引无法直接互相关联。但是第二通信协议的资源池和第三通信协议的资源池都与物理时隙具有映射关系，因此可以根据物理时隙确定第二通信协议的资源池中的PSSCH资源到第三通信协议的资源池中的PSFCH资源的映射关系。
结合第四方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一时间间隔是预配置、预定义或者由基站配置的。
可选地，所述第一时间间隔的取值范围可以是2或3。
结合第四方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第一终端在第四资源上接收数据；所述第一终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源，包括：所述第一终端根据所述第四资源、以及第二映射关系，确定所述第三资源的频域资源；其中，所述第二映射关系包括所述第四资源的频域资源与所述第三资源的频域资源的映射关系。
结合第四方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源频分复用。可选地，第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源是频分复用的。可选地，第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源有的相同有的不同，所述第三资源为和第一资源集合中的资源频分复用的资源。在此情况下，所述第一终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源，包括：所述第一终端根据第一循环偏移(cyclic shift，CS)对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源，其中，所述第一CS对表格为所述第三通信协议的CS对表格。
在上述技术方案中，第三资源与被配置为传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源频分复用，因此第二通信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输不会出现收发冲突的问题，第二通信协议的传输可以支持HARQ反馈来提高数据传输可靠性，同时也不会影响到第三通信协议的HARQ的传输和其相应的数据传输的可靠性。因为此时已经从频域上区分了第二通 信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输的资源，因此对于第二通信协议的CS对表格可以复用第三通信协议的CS对表格。
结合第四方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源，包括：所述第一终端根据第二CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；其中，所述第二CS对表格和所述第三通信协议的第一CS对表格不同。
在上述技术方案中，第一终端可以采用与第三通信协议的CS对表格不同的CS表格来确定第三资源的码域资源，从而实现第三资源与第三通信协议的控制资源码分复用，有助于避免第二通信协议的控制信息的传输和第三通信协议的控制信息的传输发生资源冲突，进而有助于提高传输可靠性。在此情况下，第三资源可以与被配置为传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源频分复用，也可以不频分复用。
结合第四方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源，包括：当第一终端确定所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源频分复用时，所述第一终端根据第一CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；当第一终端确定所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源码分复用时，所述第一终端根据第二CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；其中，所述第二CS对表格和所述第三通信协议的第一CS对表格不同。
在此情况下，第二通信协议的第二资源集合的资源和第三通信协议的第一资源集合的资源，有的频分复用，有的不频分复用而是码分复用。
在上述技术方案中，第一终端可以根据第二资源的频域资源，灵活地选择CS对表格，从而实现第三资源与被配置为传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源的频分复用或码分复用，有助于避免第二通信协议的控制信息的传输和第三通信协议的控制信息的传输发生资源冲突，进而影响传输可靠性。
结合第四方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，第二通信协议的CS对数的最大数量为W。W可以是RRC配置的(网络设备使用RRC参数配置)，或者是预定义的，或者是预配置的。示例性的，W为6或3。
其中，第二通信协议的CS对包含下述情况的至少一个：
1)CS对数为1：第三通信协议使用第一CS对，第一CS对指示取值1和取值2(取值2为和取值1成对的CS值)。第二通信协议使用第二CS对，第二CS对指示取值3和取值4(取值4为和取值3成对的CS值)。取值1和取值3不同。
示例性地，CS对为(A，B)，其中CS对的索引可以只指示A，B是和A成对的CS取值。
例如，取值1为0，取值3可以为2、3、4、5中的任意一个。例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，取值1为0，取值2为6；第二CS对为(3，9)，即取值3为3，取值4为9。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间的正交性最好，第二通信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输之间的干扰情况小。
又例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，第二CS对为(2，8)。又例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，第一CS对为(4，10)。又例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，第一CS对为(5，11)。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间还是有一定的正交性，尽可能的减少第二通信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输之间的干扰。
2)CS对数为2：第三通信协议使用第一CS对，第一CS对指示取值5(对应的成对CS为取值6)，取值7(对应的成对的CS为取值8)。第二通信协议使用第二CS对，第二CS对指示取值9(对 应的成对CS为取值10)，取值11(对应的成对CS为取值12)。其中，取值5和取值7，与取值9和取值11不同。
例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(2，8)，(4，10)，(5，11)中的任意两个。示例性地，第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(2，8)，或者，第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(2，8)，(4，10)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(4，10)，(5，11)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(2，8)，(5，11)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(5，11)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(4，10)。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间还是有一定的正交性，尽可能的减少第二通信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输之间的干扰。
3)CS对数为3：第三通信协议使用第一CS对，第一CS对指示取值12(对应的成对CS为取值13)，取值14(对应的成对的CS为取值15)，取值16(对应的成对CS为取值17)。第二通信协议使用第二CS对，第二CS对指示取值17(对应的成对CS为取值18)，取值19(对应的成对CS为取值20)，取值21(对应的成对CS为取值22)。其中，取值12，取值14和取值16，与取值17，取值19和取值21不同。
例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，(2，8)，(4，10)；第二CS对为(1，7)，(3，9)，(5，11)。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间还是有一定的正交性，尽可能的减少第二通信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输之间的干扰。
可选地，所述CS对可以是RRC配置的，或者预定义的或者是预配置。
结合第四方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二CS对表格中的第一CS对数对应的CS对与第一CS对表格中的所述第一CS对数对应的CS对不同。
可以理解为，同一个CS对数的索引，在两个CS对表格中对应的CS对不同。
结合第四方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二CS对表格包括以下表格中的至少一个表项，例如第二CS对表格包括以下表格中的至少一行：
或者，
或者，

其中，为CS对数。
结合第四方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，控制资源集合中的第二资源集合与所述第一资源集合是独立配置的，所述第二资源集合中的资源用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息，所述第三资源属于所述第二资源集合。
在上述技术方案中，通过频分复用或码分复用的方式区分使用第二通信协议传输控制信息的资源和使用第三通信协议传输控制信息的资源，可以保证第二通信协议的控制信息的传输，保证其HARQ机制正常工作，进而提高数据传输的可靠性。通过频分复用或码分复用的方式区分，可以最大限度的利用系统中的用于传输控制信息的资源，有助于提高频谱的利用效率。
结合第四方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述控制信息包括以下至少一项：HARQ信息、CSI反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。
示例性地，第二资源集合是用于传输第二通信协议的HARQ的资源的集合。第一资源集合是用于传输第三通信协议的HARQ的资源的集合。可选地，第二资源集合可以为第一资源集合，这种情况下，第二资源集合的配置信令即为配置第一资源集合的信令。可选地，第二资源集合可以和第一资源集合不同，这种情况下，第二资源集合使用信令配置。其中，第二资源集合的配置参数与第一资源集合的配置参数不同。
示例性地，第二资源集合是用于传输第二通信协议的HARQ的资源的集合。第一资源集合是用于传输第三通信协议的HARQ的资源的集合。第三资源集合是用于传输第三通信协议的资源冲突指示信息的资源的集合。可选地，第二资源集合可以为第一资源集合，这种情况下，第二资源集合的配置信令即为配置第一资源集合的信令。可选地，第二资源集合可以为第三资源集合，这种情况下，第二资源集合的配置信令即为配置第三资源集合的信令。可选地，第二资源集合可以和第一资源集合，第三资源集合不同，这种情况下，第二资源集合使用信令配置。其中，第二资源集合的配置参数与第一资源集合和第三资源集合的配置参数不同。
第五方面，提供了一种控制信息的接收方法，所述方法可以由第二终端执行，也可以由应用于第二终端的模块或单元执行，为了描述方便，下文统一称为第二终端。
所述方法包括：第二终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源；所述第二终端使用第二通信协议在所述第三资源上接收控制信息；其中，所述控制资源集合中的第一资源集合被配置为用于传输第三通信协议的控制信息，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源不同。
可选地，第二通信协议为R18 NR-V，第三通信协议为R16 NR-V。
可选地，第二通信协议为R18 NR-V，第三通信协议为R17 NR-V。
可选地，第三通信协议与第二通信协议相同。在此情况下，第一资源集合为被配置用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息的资源的集合。例如，若R18 NR-V的资源池包括两类资源，一类是R18 NR-V专用的时频资源，另一类是R18 NR-V与LTE-V共同使用的时频资源，当第二终端使用R18 NR-V在与LTE-V共同使用的时频资源传输数据时，第二终端可以使用R18 NR-V专用的资源中的剩余资源来传输该数据对应的控制信息，其中剩余资源为R18 NR-V专用的资源中被配置用于传输控制信息但是未被占用的资源。又例如，资 源集合1为R18 NR-V和LTE-V共同使用的时频资源，资源集合2为R18 NR-V使用的时频资源，其中，资源集合2包含控制资源集合，资源集合1中的数据对应的控制信息可以在资源集合2中的控制资源集合中的剩余资源来传输。
控制资源集合包括的资源或者说控制资源可以用于传输控制信息，或者说，控制资源集合为由可以用于传输控制信息的资源所构成的资源集合。
在上述技术方案中，第二终端可以使用控制资源集合中的与被配置为用于传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源不同的控制资源来传输第二通信协议的控制信息。这样，通过上述技术方案，可以实现第二终端使用和第一通信协议共同使用的时频资源来传输第二通信协议的数据，使用与被配置为用于传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源不同的控制资源来传输第二通信协议的控制信息，有助于避免第一通信协议的传输和第二通信协议的传输发生资源冲突。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源频分复用和/或码分复用。
可选地，上述控制资源集合为第三通信协议的控制资源集合，即上述控制资源集合为第一资源集合，可以理解为，第二通信协议的控制资源集合与第三通信协议的控制资源集合相同，此时第三资源与第一资源集合中的资源可以频分复用，也可以码分复用，还可以既支持频分复用又支持码分复用。在此情况下，由于第一终端利用第三通信协议的控制资源集合中与被配置为传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源不同的资源来传输第二通信协议的控制信息，因此可以提高频谱的利用效率。
可选地，上述控制资源集合包括第一资源集合和第二资源集合，其中第一资源集合为第三通信协议的控制资源集合，第二资源集合为第二通信协议的控制资源集合。第三资源属于第二资源集合。第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源频分复用。换句话说，第二资源集合与第一资源集合在频域上没有交集。
例如，第一资源集合包括PRB0、PRB1、和PRB2，第二资源集合包括PRB5、PRB6、和PRB7。
可选地，上述控制资源集合包括第一资源集合和第二资源集合。其中第一资源集合为第三通信协议的控制资源集合，第二资源集合为第二通信协议的控制资源集合。第三资源属于第二资源集合。第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源频分复用，或者第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源频域相同、码域不同。
例如，第一资源集合包括PRB0、PRB1、和PRB2，第二资源集合包括PRB2、PRB3、和PRB4。这样PRB2既可以用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息又可以用于传输第三通信协议的控制信息，为了区分，此时第二通信协议的PRB2和第三通信协议的PRB2可以码分复用。第二资源集合中的PRB0和PRB1与第二资源集合中的资源频分复用。
结合第五方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第二终端在第四资源上发送数据；所述第二终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源，包括：所述第二终端根据所述第四资源、以及第一映射关系，确定所述第三资源的时域资源；其中，所述第一映射关系包括第一物理时隙与第二物理时隙的映射关系，所述第一物理时隙为所述第四资源包括的最后一个物理时隙(即第四资源的结束位置所在物理时隙)，所述第二物理时隙为与所述第一物理时隙满足第一时间间隔的第一个包含控制资源的物理时 隙，所述第二物理时隙在所述第一物理时隙之后。所述第一时间间隔的单位可以是物理时隙。
可选地，第四资源属于和第一通信协议的传输共同使用的时频资源集合。
这里使用物理时隙是因为第三通信协议的PSSCH到PSFCH的映射关系是根据第三通信协议的资源池内的逻辑时隙确定，而第二通信协议的资源池也有自身的逻辑时隙索引，这会导致第二通信协议的资源池的逻辑时隙的索引和第三通信协议的资源池的逻辑时隙的索引无法直接互相关联。但是第二通信协议的资源池和第三通信协议的资源池都与物理时隙具有映射关系，因此可以根据物理时隙确定第二通信协议的资源池中的PSSCH资源到第三通信协议的资源池中的PSFCH资源的映射关系。
结合第五方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一时间间隔是预配置、预定义或者由基站配置的。
可选地，所述第一时间间隔的取值范围可以是2或3。
结合第五方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第二终端在第四资源上发送数据；所述第二终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源，包括：所述第二终端根据所述第四资源、以及第二映射关系，确定所述第三资源的频域资源；其中，所述第二映射关系包括所述第四资源的频域资源与所述第三资源的频域资源的映射关系。
结合第五方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源频分复用。可选地，第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源是频分复用的。可选地，第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源有的相同有的不同，所述第三资源为和第一资源集合中的资源频分复用的资源。在此情况下，所述第二终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源，包括：所述第二终端根据第一CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源，其中，所述第一CS对表格为所述第三通信协议的CS对表格。
在上述技术方案中，第三资源与被配置为传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源频分复用，因此第二通信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输不会出现收发冲突的问题，第二通信协议的传输可以支持HARQ反馈来提高数据传输可靠性，同时也不会影响到第三通信协议的HARQ的传输和其相应的数据传输的可靠性。因为此时已经从频域上区分了第二通信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输的资源，因此对于第二通信协议的CS对表格可以复用第三通信协议的CS对表格。
结合第五方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源，包括：所述第二终端根据第二CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；其中，所述第二CS对表格和所述第三通信协议的第一CS对表格不同。
在上述技术方案中，第二终端可以采用与第三通信协议的CS对表格不同的CS表格来确定第三资源的码域资源，从而实现第三资源与第三通信协议的控制资源码分复用，有助于避免第二通信协议的控制信息的传输和第三通信协议的控制信息的传输发生资源冲突，进而有助于提高传输可靠性。在此情况下，第三资源可以与被配置为传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源频分复用，也可以不频分复用。
结合第五方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源，包括：当第二终端确定所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的 资源频分复用时，所述第二终端根据第一CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；当第二终端确定所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源码分复用时，所述第二终端根据第二CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；其中，所述第二CS对表格和所述第三通信协议的第一CS对表格不同。在此情况下，第二通信协议的第二资源集合的资源和第三通信协议的第一资源集合的资源，有的频分复用，有的不频分复用而是码分复用。
在上述技术方案中，第二终端可以根据第二资源的频域资源，灵活地选择CS对表格，从而实现第三资源与被配置为传输第三通信协议的控制信息的资源的频分复用或码分复用，有助于避免第二通信协议的控制信息的传输和第三通信协议的控制信息的传输发生资源冲突，进而影响传输可靠性。
结合第五方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，第二通信协议的CS对数的最大数量为W。W可以是RRC配置的(网络设备使用RRC参数配置)，或者是预定义的，或者是预配置的。示例性的，W为6或3。
其中，第二通信协议的CS对包含下述情况的至少一个：
1)CS对数为1：第三通信协议使用第一CS对，第一CS对指示取值1和取值2(取值2为和取值1成对的CS值)。第二通信协议使用第二CS对，第二CS对指示取值3和取值4(取值4为和取值3成对的CS值)。取值1和取值3不同。
示例性地，CS对为(A，B)，其中CS对的索引可以只指示A，B是和A成对的CS取值。
例如，取值1为0，取值3可以为2、3、4、5中的任意一个。例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，取值1为0，取值2为6；第二CS对为(3，9)，即取值3为3，取值4为9。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间的正交性最好，第二通信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输之间的干扰情况小。
又例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，第二CS对为(2，8)。又例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，第一CS对为(4，10)。又例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，第一CS对为(5，11)。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间还是有一定的正交性，尽可能的减少第二通信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输之间的干扰。
2)CS对数为2：第三通信协议使用第一CS对，第一CS对指示取值5(对应的成对CS为取值6)，取值7(对应的成对的CS为取值8)。第二通信协议使用第二CS对，第二CS对指示取值9(对应的成对CS为取值10)，取值11(对应的成对CS为取值12)。其中，取值5和取值7，与取值9和取值11不同。
例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(2，8)，(4，10)，(5，11)中的任意两个。示例性地，第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(2，8)，或者，第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(2，8)，(4，10)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(4，10)，(5，11)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(2，8)，(5，11)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(5，11)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(4，10)。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间还是有一定的正交性，尽可能的减少第二通信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输之间的干扰。
3)CS对数为3：第三通信协议使用第一CS对，第一CS对指示取值12(对应的成对CS为取值13)，取值14(对应的成对的CS为取值15)，取值16(对应的成对CS为取值17)。第二通信协议使用第二CS对，第二CS对指示取值17(对应的成对CS为取值18)，取值19(对应的成对CS为取值20)，取值21(对应的成对CS为取值22)。 其中，取值12，取值14和取值16，与取值17，取值19和取值21不同。
例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，(2，8)，(4，10)；第二CS对为(1，7)，(3，9)，(5，11)。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间还是有一定的正交性，尽可能的减少第二通信协议的传输和第三通信协议的传输之间的干扰。
可选地，所述CS对可以是RRC配置的，或者预定义的或者是预配置。
结合第五方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二CS对表格中的第一CS对数对应的CS对与第一CS对表格中的所述第一CS对数对应的CS对不同。
可以理解为，同一个CS对数的索引，在两个CS对表格中对应的CS对不同。
结合第五方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二CS对表格包括以下表格中的至少一个表项，例如第二CS对表格包括以下表格中的至少一行：
或者，
或者，
其中，为CS对数。
结合第五方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，第二资源集合与所述第一资源集合是独立配置的，所述第二资源集合中的资源用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息，所述第三资源属于所述第二资源集合。
在上述技术方案中，通过频分复用或码分复用的方式区分使用第二通信协议传输控制信息的资源和使用第三通信协议传输控制信息的资源，可以保证第二通信协议的控制信息的传输，保证其HARQ机制正常工作，进而提高数据传输的可靠性。通过频分复用或码分复用的方式区分，可以最大限度的利用系统中的用于传输控制信息的资源，有助于提高频谱的利用效率。
结合第五方面或其任意实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述控制信息包括以 下至少一项：HARQ信息、CSI反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。
示例性地，第二资源集合是用于传输第二通信协议的HARQ的资源的集合。第一资源集合是用于传输第三通信协议的HARQ的资源的集合。可选地，第二资源集合可以为第一资源集合，这种情况下，第二资源集合的配置信令即为配置第一资源集合的信令。可选地，第二资源集合可以和第一资源集合不同，这种情况下，第二资源集合使用信令配置。其中，第二资源集合的配置参数与第一资源集合的配置参数不同。
示例性地，第二资源集合是用于传输第二通信协议的HARQ的资源的集合。第一资源集合是用于传输第三通信协议的HARQ的资源的集合。第三资源集合是用于传输第三通信协议的资源冲突指示信息的资源的集合。可选地，第二资源集合可以为第一资源集合，这种情况下，第二资源集合的配置信令即为配置第一资源集合的信令。可选地，第二资源集合可以为第三资源集合，这种情况下，第二资源集合的配置信令即为配置第三资源集合的信令。可选地，第二资源集合可以和第一资源集合，第三资源集合不同，这种情况下，第二资源集合使用信令配置。其中，第二资源集合的配置参数与第一资源集合和第三资源集合的配置参数不同。
第六方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置用于执行上述任意一方面或其实现方式提供的方法。具体地，该装置可以包括用于执行上述任意一方面或其实现方式提供的方法的单元和/或模块，如处理单元和/或通信单元。
在一种实现方式中，该装置为第一终端或第二终端。当该装置为第一终端或第二终端时，通信单元可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口；处理单元可以是至少一个处理器。可选地，收发器为收发电路。可选地，输入/输出接口为输入/输出电路。
在另一种实现方式中，该装置为应用于第一终端或第二终端中的芯片、芯片系统或电路。当该装置为应用于第一终端或第二终端中的芯片、芯片系统或电路时，通信单元可以是该芯片、芯片系统或电路上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等；处理单元可以是至少一个处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路等。
第七方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括：存储器，用于存储程序；至少一个处理器，用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，以执行上述任意一方面或其实现方式提供的方法。
在一种实现方式中，该装置为第一终端或第二终端。
在另一种实现方式中，该装置为应用于第一终端或第二终端中的芯片、芯片系统或电路。
第八方面，提供了一种处理器，用于执行上述各方面提供的方法。
对于处理器所涉及的发送和获取/接收等操作，如果没有特殊说明，或者，如果未与其在相关描述中的实际作用或者内在逻辑相抵触，则可以理解为处理器输出和接收、输入等操作，也可以理解为由射频电路和天线所进行的发送和接收操作，本申请对此不做限定。
第九方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读介质存储用于设备执行的程序代码，该程序代码包括用于执行上述任意一方面或其实现方式提供的方法。
第十方面，提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述任意一方面或其实现方式提供的方法。
第十一方面，提供了一种芯片，芯片包括处理器与通信接口，处理器通过通信接口读 取存储器上存储的指令，执行上述任意一方面或其实现方式提供的方法。
可选地，作为一种实现方式，芯片还包括存储器，存储器中存储有计算机程序或指令，处理器用于执行存储器上存储的计算机程序或指令，当计算机程序或指令被执行时，处理器用于执行上述任意一方面或其实现方式提供的方法。
第十二方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括上文所述第一终端和/或第二终端。
附图说明
图1是可以应用本申请的技术方案的V2X系统的示意图。
图2是PSFCH资源的一个示意图。
图3是NR-V2X的时隙结构的示意图。
图4是PSSCH资源与PSFCH资源映射关系的一个示例(1)。
图5是PSSCH资源与PSFCH资源映射关系的一个示例(2)。
图6是单个候选资源确定方式的一个示例。
图7是物理时隙和逻辑时隙的一个示例。
图8是资源选择的时序图。
图9是R18 NR-V终端的内部模块结构的一个示意图。
图10是本申请提供的控制信息的发送方法1000的示意图。
图11是SCI指示的预留资源的一个示例。
图12是第一资源的所在时隙的一个示例。
图13是单个PSFCH候选资源的一个示例。
图14是本申请提供的数据的发送方法1300的示意图。
图15是本申请提供的控制信息的接收方法1400的示意图。
图16是第一资源池与第二资源池采用时分复用的方式共享频谱的一个示例。
图17是PSSCH资源与PSFCH资源映射关系的一个示例。
图18是本申请提供的控制信息的发送方法1700的示意图。
图19是PSSCH资源与PSFCH资源映射关系的一个示例。
图20是一个子信道对应的频域资源和码域资源的一个示例。
图21是本申请提供的控制信息的接收方法2000的示意图。
图22是本申请的实施例提供的装置的结构示意图。
图23是本申请的实施例提供的装置的另一结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请的技术方案可以应用于各种终端与终端通信的场景。例如，设备到设备(device to device，D2D)场景、车到一切(vehicle to everything，V2X)场景、机器通信(machine type communication，MTC)/机器到机器通信(machine to machine，M2M)场景等。
本申请的终端可以为包含无线收发功能、且可以为用户提供通讯服务的设备。具体地，终端可以为V2X系统中的设备、D2D系统中的设备、MTC系统中的设备等。例如，终端可以指工业机器人、工业自动化设备、用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端、用户 单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、无线终端、移动终端、用户端设备(customer premise equipment，CPE)、车载终端、用户代理、用户装置、虚拟现实中的终端、增强现实中的终端、远程医疗中的终端、智能电网中的终端、智能家具中的终端、智能办公中的终端、智能穿戴中的终端、智能交通中的终端、或智慧城市中的终端等。又例如，终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备，第五代(5thgeneration，5G)网络或5G之后的网络中的终端或未来演进的通信网络中的终端等。
本申请的实施例对终端所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。
下面将以V2X场景为例对本申请的技术方案进行描述。
图1是可以应用本申请的技术方案的V2X系统的示意图。
如图1所示，该系统可以包括多个车辆和网络等。其中，车到车(vehicle to vehicle，V2V)为车辆与车辆之间的通信，车到行人(vehicle to pedestrian，V2P)为车辆与行人之间的通信，车到网络(vehicle to network，V2N)为车辆与网络之间的通信。车辆之间可以使用基础设施或网络配置的通信资源池进行设备间通信。车辆与接入网设备之间的连接为上行链路和下行链路，车辆与车辆之间的连接为侧行链路。
应理解，图1只是一种示意图不对本申请的保护范围构成任何限定。例如，图1中所示的车辆的个数只是一种举例。
需要说明的是，本申请描述的场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请的技术方案，并不构成对于本申请的技术方案的限定，本领域普通技术人员可知，随着新业务场景的出现，本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题，同样适用。
为了便于理解，下面对本申请涉及的名词、术语或技术进行说明。
1、HARQ技术
在无线通信系统，在收发双方，通常采用混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request，HARQ)技术来保证数据传输的正确性。HARQ技术将前向纠错(forward error correction，FEC)与自动重传请求(automatic repeat request，ARQ)结合起来，数据块(一般称为一个传输块(transport block，TB))编码后，第一次传输时发送信息比特和一部分冗余比特。若接收端能够正确译码则反馈确认(acknowledgement，ACK)信号给发送端，发送端接收到ACK信号后确认接收端已经成功接收到相应的信息比特，认为该数据块已经成功传输。若接收端不能正确译码，则接收端向发送端反馈否认(negative acknowledgement，NACK)信号给发送端，发送端接收到NACK信号后再进一步传输一部分信息比特和/或冗余比特(称为重传数据)给接收端，接收端接收到重传数据后，与之前接收到的数据合并后进行译码，若加上重传数据仍然无法正确译码，则可以进行再次重传。随着重传次数的增加，信息比特和/或冗余比特不断积累，信道编码率不断降低，从而可以不断提升译码效果。
2、PSFCH
LTE V2X中支持广播，即发送终端发送数据，对接收终端没有任何限制。在此基础上，NR V2X中引入单播和组播。单播即一对终端之间进行通信，组播即发送终端发送数 据，有限数量的组内终端进行接收。
单播和组播中支持HARQ反馈。单播和组播支持ACK/NACK的反馈方式，即接收终端成功接收数据则反馈ACK，没有成功接收数据则反馈NACK。此外，组播还支持NACK only的反馈方式，即多个接收终端在同一个控制资源上只反馈NACK，即接收终端没有成功接收数据则反馈NACK，成功接收数据则不发送任何反馈信号。
单播和组播的HARQ信息使用反馈信道承载，该反馈信道则为物理侧行反馈信道(physical sidelink feedback channel，PSFCH)。
3、资源池
资源池是时频资源集合。例如，资源池为侧行链路中终端用于传输PSSCH或接收物理侧行共享信道(physical sidelink share channel，PSSCH)的时频资源的集合。终端可以被配置一个或多个资源池。
资源池也可以替换为时频资源集合，为了描述方便下文统一称为资源池。
4、PSFCH资源的配置周期
PSFCH资源是周期性的配置在资源池上的。PSFCH资源的配置周期是N个时隙。例如，N＝0、1、2或4。其中，N＝0表示没有HARQ反馈资源，即去使能HARQ反馈；N＝1、2或4表示每1、2或4个时隙有一个PSFCH资源。
图2是PSFCH资源的一个示意图。图2以N＝4为例，在资源池中，每4个时隙中有一个时隙包含PSFCH资源。
5、NR-V2X的时隙结构
图3是NR-V2X的时隙结构的示意图。
在标准循环前缀(normal cyclic prefix，NCP)下，一个时隙包括14个符号。
不包含PSFCH资源的时隙结构如图3的(a)图所示，每个时隙的第1个符号(如图3的(a)图中的符号0)用于自动增益控制(automatic gain control，AGC)。每个时隙内用于承载PSCCH的符号个数是在每个资源池上配置的，可以为2到3个符号(图3的(a)图中为符号1和2)，该PSCCH中承载第一级侧行控制信息(sidelink control information，SCI)。每个时隙的最后一个符号为保护间隔(guard period，GP)。时隙中的其余符号可以用于发送数据和第二级SCI。
包含PSFCH资源的时隙结构如图3的(b)图所示，图3的(b)图以在时隙的第12个符号和第13个符号用于承载PSFCH为例。每个时隙的第1个符号(如图3的(b)图中的符号0)用于AGC。每个时隙内用于承载PSCCH的符号个数是在每个资源池上配置的，可以为2到3个符号(图3的(a)图中为符号1和2)，该PSCCH中承载第一级SCI。每个时隙的最后一个符号和第11个符号(如图3的(b)图中的符号10和13)为GP。时隙中的其余符号可以用于发送数据和第二级SCI。
6、R16 NR-V的PSFCH资源的确定
1)HARQ反馈的定时，即PSFCH资源的时域资源的确定。
对于NR-V2X，HARQ反馈的定时即PSSCH到PSFCH之间的时间间隔。假设一个PSSCH传输的结束位置在时隙n，相应的进行HARQ反馈的时隙为在包括n+k时隙在内以及n+k时隙后的第一个存在PSFCH资源的时隙。其中，k体现终端的处理能力，例如，k可以为2或3等。
2)PSFCH资源的频域资源和码域资源的确定
在一个配置的资源池内，PSFCH的频域资源和码域资源是使用隐式关联的规则确定的。
终端会被提供资源池中的一个PRB集合，该PRB集合中PRB的数量为终端在这个PRB集合中的一个PRB上进行PSFCH的传输。资源池的子信道个数记为Nsubch，与PSFCH时隙相关联的PSSCH时隙的个数为终端为时隙i和子信道j从个PRB中分配个PRB。其中，0≤j＜Nsubch，并且这个分配从i的升序顺序开始，i遍历结束后继续使用j的升序顺序遍历。终端期待是的倍数。
终端根据公式确定可用于传输PSFCH的资源的个数。其中，是资源池的循环偏移(cyclic shift，CS)对数。则个PRB与相应的PSSCH的起始子信道相关联，则个PRB与PSSCH相应的一个或个子信道相关联。或是配置在资源池上的。
PSFCH资源首先按照PRB的索引在个PRB中进行升序的排序，然后从个CS对中按照CS对的索引进行升序的排序。
终端根据确定一个PSFCH资源的索引，其中，PID是第二级SCI中提供的物理层源标识(identity，ID)，MID为0或时接收PSSCH的终端被高层指示的标识。
图4和图5是PSSCH资源与PSFCH资源映射关系的一个示例。
假设如图4所示，N＝2(即每2个时隙中有一个时隙包含PSFCH资源)，k＝2，与包含PSFCH资源的时隙3对应的PSSCH时隙个数为2(即)，子信道的个数为3(即Nsubch＝3)，子信道包含10个PRB，可用于传输HARQ信息的PRB为30个，配置用于传输HARQ信息的PRB个数为12(即)。这样，每个子信道可以对应2个资源块(physical resource block，PRB)，例如，子信道(0，0)对应于子信道索引为0和时隙索引为0。
假设CS对数的配置为3(即)，则子信道(0，0)对应的频域资源和码域资源如图5所示，即一个子信道对应了6个可用于传输HARQ信息的资源。
8、单个候选资源
单个候选资源Rx，y定义为在时隙的连续的Lsubch个子信道，其中，子信道的编号为x+j，其中j＝0，...，Lsubch-1。在资源选择窗下，资源池内包括的任何连续Lsubch个子信道为一个单个候选资源。
图6是单个候选资源确定方式的一个示例。
假设资源池的时隙集合定义为资源池的频域资源包括10个子信道 (如图6的子信道1至子信道10)，资源选择窗包括时隙1(即)，Lsbch＝7。这样，时隙1包括R1，1、R2，1、R3，1以及R4，1四个单个候选资源。
9、物理时隙和逻辑时隙
举例对物理时隙和逻辑时隙进行解释。
图7是物理时隙和逻辑时隙的一个示例。图7以LTE-V和R16 NR-V通过时分复用(time division multiplexing，TDM)的方式共享频谱为例。其中，LTE-V对应于物理时隙1、2、4、5、7、8，R16 NR-V对应于物理时隙0、3、6、9。对于LTE-V来说，物理时隙1、2、4、5、7、8相当于LTE-V的逻辑时隙0、1、2、3、4、5，这里的0、1、2、3、4、5即为逻辑时隙索引。对于R16 NR-V来说，物理时隙0、3、6、9相当于R16 NR-V的逻辑时隙0、1、2、3，这里的0、1、2、3即为逻辑时隙的索引。
10、选择用于传输PSSCH的资源
图8是资源选择的时序图。
假设资源池的时隙集合定义为
步骤1，终端确定资源选择窗[n+T1，n+T2]。
其中，n为被触发进行资源选择的时刻。
其中，T1的取值取决于终端的实现，但是T1需要满足：其中，取值与子载波间隔有关。例如，的取值可以根据表1确定，表1示出了不同子载波间隔下的的取值。
表1
其中，T2的取值与T2的最小取值和剩余的包时延预算(packet delay budget，PDB)有关。例如，若T2min的取值比PDB小，则T2的取值取决于终端的实现，但是T2需要满足：T2min≤T2≤PDB；若T2min的取值比PDB大，则T2的取值为PDB，其中T2min为T2的最小取值，PDB以时隙为单位。
在资源选择窗[n+T1，n+T2]下，资源池内单个候选资源的总数记为Mtotal。例如，如图6所示一个时隙对应的单个候选资源为4个，若资源选择窗[n+T1，n+T2]内包括5个时隙，则单个候选资源的数量为20，即Mtotal＝20。
单个候选资源的描述可以参考上文，在此不再赘述。
步骤2，终端确定资源感知窗
其中，n为被触发进行资源选择的时刻。
其中，T0是与资源感知窗对应的时隙的个数。
其中，的取值与子载波间隔有关。例如，的取值可以根据表2确定，表2示出了不同子载波间隔下的的取值。
表2
步骤3，终端获取资源感知窗内的感知结果。
其中，感知结果可以包括以下至少一项：PSCCH解码结果和RSRP测量结果。
步骤4，终端根据感知结果，确定用于传输PSSCH的资源。
一种可能的实现方式，假设用于传输PSSCH的资源的集合为SA，SA的初始值为在资源选择窗[n+T1，n+T2]下资源池1内单个候选资源的集合。终端从SA中排除同时满足以下条件的单个候选资源Rx，y。
条件1：接收到SCI，且该SCI包括资源预留周期字段、以及优先级字段。
例如，终端在时隙接收到SCI，且该SCI包括资源预留周期字段、以及优先级字段。其中，资源预留周期字段指示prsvp_RX，优先级字段指示prioRX。
条件2：SCI指示的预留资源对应的RSRP测量值高于RSRP阈值A。
其中，A为Th(prsvp_RX，prioRX)。
条件3：单个候选资源与SCI中指示的预留资源有重叠。
例如，终端在时隙接收到SCI，且该SCI包括资源预留周期字段，则终端预计在时隙可以接收到相同的SCI，终端确定与重叠的RB和时隙的集合。
其中，q＝1，2，...，Q，j＝0，1，...，Cresel-1。这里的p′rsvp_RX是将prsvp_RX转换成以逻辑时隙为单位后得到的。如果prsvp_RX＜Tscal并且n′-m≤p′rsvp_RX，其中，如果时隙n属于集合否则时隙时时隙n后属于集合的第一个时隙；否则Q＝1。Tscal是将T2转换成以毫秒(msec)为单位后得到的。
然后，终端判断SA中的单个候选资源的个数是否大于X·Mtotal。若SA中的单个候选资源个数小于X·Mtotal，则终端将RSRP阈值Th(prsvp_RX，prioRX)增加3dB，并重新执行排除的过程。若SA中的单个候选资源个数达到X·Mtotal，则排除过程结束，当前SA为可以用于传输PSSCH的单个候选资源的集合。
步骤5，终端从当前SA中选择用于传输PSSCH的单个候选资源。
选择用于传输PSSCH的资源的详细实现方式可以参考现有技术，在此不再详述。
上面对本申请中涉及到的术语做了简单说明，下文实施例中不再赘述。
目前，在第一通信协议和第二通信协议使用相同的时频资源的场景下，存在使用第二通信协议的进行通信的终端不明确第一通信协议所占用的资源的情况。在此情况下，第一终端在使用第二通信协议进行通信时易和第一通信协议所占用的资源发生资源冲突。
针对上述问题，本申请提供了一种技术方案终端在确定传输第二通信协议的控制信息的可用资源时考虑第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源，可以避免使用第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源传输第二通信协议的控制信息，从而有助于避免第一通信协议的传输和第二通信协议的传输发生资源冲突。
为便于理解本申请实施例，在介绍本申请实施例之前，先做出以下几点说明。
第一，第一通信协议和第二通信协议共信道共存。可以理解为，第一通信协议和第二通信协议使用相同的时频资源集合。可以理解为，第一通信协议和第二通信协议共享资源池。也可以理解为，第一通信协议的资源池与第二通信协议的资源池完全相同。也可以理解为，第一通信协议的资源池内的时频资源集合与第二通信协议的资源池的时频资源集合完全相同，且第二通信协议的终端明确该资源池为共享的资源池。还可以理解为，第二通信协议的资源池包含了和第一通信协议共享的时频资源。或者，第二通信协议的资源池和第一通信协议的资源池在时域上有重叠(或者使用相同的时域资源)。为了描述方便，下文将该第二通信协议的资源池记为第一资源池。
第二，本申请不限定第一通信协议、第二通信协议和第三通信协议的具体协议类型。例如，第一通信协议为LTE-V，第二通信协议为任意一个版本的NR-V(例如，R18 NR-V、R19 NR-V、R20 NR-V等)。又例如，第一通信协议为LTE-Sidelink，第二通信协议为任意一个版本的NR-Sidelink(例如，R18 NR-Sidelink、R19 NR-Sidelink、R20 NR-Sidelink等)。又例如，第二通信协议为任意一个版本的NR-V或NR-Sidelink，第三通信协议为R16 NR sidelink、R16 NR-V、R17 NR sidelink、R17 NR-V等。又例如，第二通信协议和第三通信协议相同，且为为任意一个版本的NR-V或NR-Sidelink(例如，R18 NR-V、R19 NR-V、R20 NR-V、R18 NR-Sidelink、R19 NR-Sidelink、R20 NR-Sidelink等)。需要说明的是，NR-V与NR-Sidelink可以相互替换，LTE-V与LTE-Sidelink可以相互替换。
为了便于理解，下文以第一通信协议为LTE-V、第二通信协议为R18 NR-V、第三通信协议为R16 NR-V对本申请的技术方案进行描述。
第三，在本申请中，某个通信协议的终端，可以理解为包含该通信协议模块的终端或支持该通信协议的终端。例如，R18 NR-V终端可理解为包含R18 NR-V模块的终端或者支持R18 NR-V功能的终端。
图9是R18 NR-V终端的内部模块结构的一个示意图。如图9所示，终端内包括LTE-V模块和NR-V模块，其中NR-V模块包括R18 NR-V模块。
第四，在本申请中，终端使用某个通信协议发送或接收信号，可以理解为，终端使用该通信协议的无线接入发送或接收信号，或者，终端通过该通信协议模块接收或发送信号，或者，终端采用该通信协议对应的无线通信技术接受或发送信号，或者，终端接收或发送信号满足该通信协议的要求等。
第五，在本申请中，用于传输数据的资源，也可以替换为，用于传输PSSCH的资源、PSSCH资源、或数据资源，用于传输PSCCH和PSSCH的资源等。用于传输控制信息的资源，也可以替换为，用于传输PSFCH的资源、PSFCH资源、控制资源或反馈资源等。
第六，在本申请中，“用于指示”或“指示”可以包括用于直接指示和用于间接指示，或者说“用于指示”或“指示”可以显式地和/或隐式地指示。例如，当描述某一信息用于指示信息I时，可以包括该信息直接指示I或间接指示I，而并不代表该信息中一定携带 有I。又例如，隐式指示可以基于传输的位置和/或资源；显式指示可以基于一个或多个参数，和/或一个或多个索引，和/或一个或多个它所表示的位模式。
第七，本申请对很多特性所列出的定义仅用于以举例方式来解释该特性的功能，其详细内容可以参考现有技术。
第八，在下文示出的实施例中，第一、第二、第三、第四以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分，并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如，区分不同的通信协议、不同的资源集合等。
第九，“预定义”可以通过在设备(例如，包括终端)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现，本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。其中，“保存”可以是指，保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器可以是单独的设置，也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器，处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器也可以是一部分单独设置，一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质，本申请并不对此限定。
第十，本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议，例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议，本申请对此不做限定。
第十一，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a、b和c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a，或，b，或，c，或，a和b，或，a和c，或，b和c，或，a、b和c。其中a、b和c分别可以是单个，也可以是多个。
另外，在本申请中，“作为一个示例”“示例性地”“示例的”等用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例”的任何实施例或实现方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或实现方案更优选或更具优势。
针对R18 NR-V与LTE-V共信道共存(共享第一资源池，或者共同使用第一资源池内的部分或全部时频资源)的场景，R18 NR-V的终端可以动态地在第一资源池内选择资源，并在所选择的资源上传输数据或控制信息。由于第一资源池是共享资源池且LTE-V的标准化已经结束，因此在设计控制信息的传输机制的过程中应尽可能减少对LTE-V的改动或者不对LTE-V的进行改动。
在本申请中，控制信息可以包括以下至少一项：HARQ信息、CSI反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。其中，HARQ信息可以是接收数据的终端成功译码接收到的数据时向数据的发送数据的终端反馈的ACK信息；或者，HARQ信息可以是接收数据的终端没有成功译码接收到的数据时向发送数据的终端反馈的NACK信息。可选地，HARQ信息可以是组播反馈选项1的ACK或NACK，或者是组播反馈选项2的NACK only(只在所述第一终端没有成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的NACK信息)，或者是单播的ACK或NACK。
对于控制信息的传输，R18 NR-V可以有很多处理方式。示例性地，R18 NR-V可以采用以下方式1、方式2或方式3。
方式1
R18 NR-V不支持控制信息的传输。
当R18 NR-V不支持控制信息的传输时，R18 NR-V终端在传输数据时进行盲重传。其中，盲重传可以理解为数据的重复传输，其中，重复传输的次数可以是配置或与预配置的，也可以是在调度信令中动态指示的。
这种方法标准化简单，工作量小，R18 NR-V通过盲重传的方式也可以保证一定的可靠性。
方式2
预配置或者配置优先级门限，其中，配置可以由网络设备配置，若R18 NR-V终端传输数据的优先级低于该门限(优先级值高于该门限)，则R18 NR-V终端在第一资源池上传输数据。
可选地，若R18 NR-V终端传输数据的优先级值低于该门限(优先级较高)，则R18NR-V终端在专用于R18 NR-V传输的时频资源集合上传输数据。其中，专用于R18 NR-V传输的时频资源集合可以理解为共享时频资源。
由于LTE-V和NR-V使用相同的时频资源，可能会出现LTE-V的传输和NR-V的传输发生冲突，因此低优先级的NR-V的传输在共享时频资源上传输，高优先级的NR-V的传输在专用时频资源上传输，可以保证高优先级的传输的可靠性。
方式3
R18 NR-V支持控制信息的传输，方式3的描述详见下文。
上述方式2和方式3可以单独实施，也可以结合在一起实施，本申请不予限制。
下面对上述方式3进行详细描述。在方式3中，以第一终端接收数据、发送控制信息，以及第二终端发送数据、接收控制信息为例。
图10是本申请提供的控制信息的发送方法1000的示意图。方法1000可以应用于上述图1所示的网络架构中，但不作限定。方法1000可以由第一终端执行，也可以由应用于第一终端的模块或单元执行，为了描述方便，下文统一称为第一终端。方法1000可以包括以下内容的至少部分内容。
步骤1010，第一终端获取第一信息。
其中，第一信息是LTE-V的传输的相关信息，用于确定第一资源池中LTE-V的传输所占用的资源。第一资源池为R18 NR-V的资源池。
LTE-V的传输所占用的资源，也可以替换为，LTE-V的传输的预留资源、LTE-V所占用的资源、或LTE-V的预留资源，或LTE-V的传输所指示的资源等。
第一信息可以包括以下信息中的至少一项：SCI、或SCI对应的信号质量测量值。其中，SCI包括LTE-V的传输的资源指示信息和/或LTE-V的传输的资源预留字段。其中，SCI对应的信号质量可以通过以下信息中的至少一个表征：RSRP、RSSI、SNR、或SINR。SCI对应的信号质量测量值可以为该SCI调度的PSSCH承载的DMRS的信号质量测量值，也可以是该SCI所在的PSCCH承载的DMRS的信号质量测量值，不予限制。可选地，SCI对应的信号质量可以为至少一个符号上的能量或者是一个时隙上的能量。
可选地，该SCI也可以理解为SA，或者替换为PSCCH解码信息。
可选地，第一信息包括在一个时域资源集合内的PSCCH解码信息和RSRP测量信息。 其中，该时域资源集合的位置的确定方式包括以下至少一个：预定义、预配置、第一终端的LTE-V模块传输给NR-V模块的、或NR-V模块确定，发送给LTE-V模块的。该时域资源集合的位置的指示方式包括下述各项的至少一个：时域资源集合的起始位置、时域资源集合的结束位置、时域资源集合的长度、时域资源集合的结束位置为NR-V模块接收到时域资源集合的指示信息的位置、或时域资源集合的结束位置为NR-V模块接收到时域资源集合的指示信息的位置往前一个时间间隔。
上述时间间隔是LTE-V模块到NR-V模块的传输(发送或透传)时间。上述时域资源集合的起始位置的参考点是系统帧号，比如DFN为0的位置，或者是SFN为0的位置。上述时间资源集合的起始位置由该参考点和一个时间偏移值确定。
可选地，上述时域资源集合是连续的，例如时域资源集合是一个时间窗。
LTE-V的传输所占用的资源可以包括：第一终端的LTE-V的传输所占用的资源和/或第一终端以外的终端的LTE-V的传输所占用的资源，或者LTE-V的传输所占用的资源可以是一个时域资源集合所包含的LTE-V的传输所占用的资源。
示例性地，第一信息是LTE-V的传输的SCI。SCI指示了当前SCI的传输所使用的资源以及预留资源。其中预留资源是SCI所指示的，并没有被使用的资源。例如，如图11所示，SCI在资源1中传输，指示了3个资源，资源1，资源2，资源3，其中，资源2和资源3在传输SCI时还没有被使用，称为预留资源。
可选地，第一信息可以是第一终端获取的LTE-V的传输的感知信息(例如是PSCCH解码信息和RSRP测量信息)。
第一终端获取感知信息的方式有很多，本申请不予限制。
一种可能的实现方式，由第一终端的LTE-V模块在第一资源感知窗进行感知测量得到感知信息，再由第一终端的R18 NR-V模块从第一终端的LTE-V模块获取感知信息。本申请不限定第一终端的R18 NR-V模块从第一终端的LTE-V模块获取感知信息的实现方式。例如，第一终端的R18 NR-V模块向第一终端的LTE-V模块请求第一资源感知窗内的感知信息，第一终端的LTE-V模块在接收到第一终端的R18 NR-V模块的请求后向第一终端的R18 NR-V模块发送相应的感知信息。又例如，第一终端的LTE-V模块定时向第一终端的R18 NR-V模块发送感知信息，第一终端的R18 NR-V模块从本地获取第一资源感知窗内的感知信息。
其中，第一资源感知窗的描述可以参考图8的相关描述，不同的是第一资源感知窗为选择传输控制信息的资源的资源感知窗，第一资源感知窗与图8中的资源感知窗可以相同，也可以不同。
可选地，第一资源感知窗为上述时域资源集合。
另一种可能的实现方式，由第一终端的R18 NR-V模块进行感知测量，得到LTE-V的感知信息。
再一种可能的实现方式，第一终端从除第一终端以外的使用LTE-V的无线接入传输数据或控制信息的终端获取感知信息。
步骤1020，第一终端根据第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源。
一种可能的实现方式，第一终端从第一资源池中确定第一资源，进一步地，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。
1)第一终端从第一资源池中确定第一资源。
第一终端从第一资源池中确定第一资源的方式有很多，本申请不予限制。
一种可能的实现方式，第一终端可以通过下文的步骤1至步骤2确定从第一资源池中确定第一资源。
步骤1，第一终端确定第一资源的时域资源。
示例性地，第一终端确定第一资源所在的时隙。针对R18 NR-V，在第一资源池上配置周期性的控制资源，其中控制资源的配置周期是N个时隙。例如，N＝0、1、2或4。其中，N＝0表示没有用于传输控制信息的资源，即R18 NR-V不支持控制信息的传输；N＝1、2或4表示每1、2或4个时隙有一个PSFCH资源。当然，N的取值也可以是其他数值，不局限于0、1、2或4。在此情况下，第一终端根据传输PSSCH的时域资源，确定第一资源的时域资源，传输PSSCH的资源的选择可以参考上文，在此不再赘述。作为一个示例，假设一个PSSCH传输的结束位置在时隙n，则第一终端在时隙n+k以及时隙n+k后的第一个存在PSFCH资源的时隙内传输控制信息。即第一资源所在时隙为时隙n+k以及时隙n+k后的第一个存在PSFCH资源的时隙。其中，k体现第一终端的处理能力，是考虑到第一终端的处理PSSCH和生成控制信息的时延，k的取值可以是预定义的、预配置的、或者由网络设备通过RRC信令配置的。例如K可以为2或3；可选地，K是配置在资源池上的。
需要说明的是，在第一资源池上配置的周期性的PSFCH资源，可以理解为，定义了PSFCH资源集合，但是该PSFCH资源集合中的PSFCH资源是否可以用于传输控制信息还需要进一步确定。
图12是第一资源的所在时隙的一个示例。
在图12中，假设PSFCH资源的配置周期为N＝2(即每2个时隙中有一个时隙包含PSFCH资源，例如图12中的逻辑时隙1、3、5、7、9)、以及k＝3。若第一终端在逻辑时隙2上传输PSSCH，则第一终端在逻辑时隙5上接收PSFCH。若第一终端在逻辑时隙4上传输PSSCH，则第一终端在逻辑时隙7上接收PSFCH。若第一终端在逻辑时隙5上传输PSSCH，则第一终端在逻辑时隙9上接收PSFCH。
可选地，对于周期性配置的PSFCH资源，R18 NR-V的数据传输，不使用周期性配置的PSFCH资源。换句话说，使用R18 NR-V传输的终端认为周期性配置的PSFCH资源只能用于传输控制信息，不可以用于传输数据。换句话说，使用R18 NR-V传输的终端在使用包含传输HARQ的资源的子信道传输数据时，速率匹配时要排除该时隙该子信道内的传输HARQ的资源。这样可以保证终端设备对于PSFCH资源是否用于传输的理解是对齐的，避免出现终端设备接收数据时不清楚数据是否在PSFCH资源传输而导致的盲检或者解码失败，盲检也会增加终端的实现复杂程度。步骤2，第一终端确定第一资源中的频域资源和码域资源。
一种可能的实现方式，第一终端可以采用R16 NR-V中确定PSFCH资源的频域资源和码域资源的方式，详细的描述可以参考上文的术语描述部分的“PSFCH的频域资源和码域资源”，在此不再赘述。
2)第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。
第一终端确定第一资源是否为可用资源的方式很多，本申请不做具体限定。示例性地， 终端可以通过下文的方法1至方法6来确定第一资源是否为可用。
方法1
在第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。其中，预设条件为：与根据第一信息确定的LTE-V的传输所占用的资源有重叠，且信号质量测量值大于第一阈值，候选资源是第一终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
候选资源是为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，可以理解为，候选资源可以用于传输数据，或者候选资源为在为传输数据而选择资源时可供选择的资源，或者候选资源属于数据资源，或者候选资源是为资源选择时的候选资源，或者候选资源为资源选择时候选资源集合中的资源。
可选地，第一时间单元包括第一时隙，和/或，频域单元包括子信道。例如，候选资源可以为在第一时隙的连续L个子信道，例如，候选资源的集合属于上文的术语描述部分的“选择用于传输PSSCH的资源”中的SA。例如，候选资源可以为上文的术语描述部分的“单个候选资源Rx，y”。
这里的第一阈值的确定方式可以为为传输数据进行资源选择时所使用的阈值的确定方式。
可选地，上述信号质量的测量值是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量的测量值。
可选地，上述信号质量的测量值为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量的测量值。
可选地，信号质量的测量值可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量的测量值，或者是第一时隙上的能量的测量值。
可选地，上述能量的测量值可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
这里的预设条件也可以描述为：
条件1：接收到SCI，且该SCI包括时域资源指示信息、频域资源指示信息、资源预留字段、以及优先级字段。
条件2：SCI指示的资源对应的信号质量测量值高于阈值A。
条件3：候选资源与SCI中指示的资源有重叠。其中，阈值A对应于第一阈值，详细描述可以参考上文的术语描述部分的“选择用于传输PSSCH的资源”中的条件1至条件3，在此不再赘述。
其中，SCI指示的资源可以理解为SCI所指示的预留资源。也就是SCI中指示的资源中在发送SCI的时刻还没有被使用的资源。
通常SCI指示的资源对应的信号质量测量值可以采用SCI对应的信号质量测量值，即SCI指示的资源对应的信号质量量值可以为SCI调度的PSSCH承载的DMRS的信号质量测量值，也可以是SCI所在的PSCCH承载的DMRS的信号质量测量值，不予限制。换句话说，当第一资源所在的可以用于传输数据的候选资源为可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的可以用于传输数据的候选资源为不可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
方法2
在第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。其中，预设条件为：与根据第一信息确定的LTE-V的传输所占用 的资源有重叠，且信号质量测量值大于第一阈值，候选资源是第一终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输数据的候选资源均为可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输数据的候选资源中一个或多个候选资源为不可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
方法2中各个术语的解释可以参考方法1，在此不再赘述。
方法3
在第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。其中，预设条件为：与根据第一信息确定的LTE-V的传输所占用的资源有重叠，且信号质测量值大于第二阈值，候选资源是第一终端为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
候选资源是为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，可以理解为，候选资源可以用于传输控制信息，或者候选资源为在为传输控制信息而选择资源时可供选择的资源，或者候选资源属于控制资源。
可选地，第一时间单元包括第一时隙，和/或，频域单元包括子信道和PRB。例如，候选资源可以为在第一时隙的连续L个子信道。又例如，候选资源可以为在第一时隙的连续L个PRB。又例如，候选资源可以为在第一时隙的P个符号的连续L个子信道，P为大于或者等于1的整数，例如，候选资源可以为如图13所示单个PSFCH候选资源，单个PSFCH候选资源在时域上为符号，在频域上为连续的Lsubch个子信道。又例如，候选资源可以为在第一时隙的P个符号的连续L个PRB，P为大于或者等于1的整数。
这里的第二阈值可以为为传输控制信息进行资源选择时所使用的阈值。可选地，第二阈值可以与上文的第一阈值不同。可选地，第二阈值小于上文的第一阈值。
可选地，第二阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合。可以理解为，第二阈值所属的阈值表格或阈值集合与第一阈值所属的阈值表格或阈值集合不同，或者第二阈值所属的阈值表格或阈值集合相对于第一阈值所属的阈值表格或阈值集合是独立设置和/或配置的。
可选地，第二阈值是绝对阈值。可以理解为，第二阈值不是通过阈值表格或阈值集合配置的，可以是一个独立的阈值。
可选地，上述信号质量的测量值是第一通信协议的传输相应的信号质量的测量值。
可选地，上述信号质量的测量值为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量的测量值。
可选地，信号质量的测量值可以为第一时隙的P个符号上的能量的测量值，或者是第一时隙上的能量的测量值。
可选地，上述能量的测量值可以用RSSI、SNR、或SINR中的至少一个来表示。
这里的预设条件也可以描述为：
条件1：接收到SCI，且该SCI包括时域资源指示信息，频域资源指示信息，资源预留字段、以及优先级字段(也可以替换为PPPP字段)。
条件2：SCI指示的资源对应的信号质量测量值高于阈值B。
条件3：候选资源与SCI中指示的资源有重叠。
其中，阈值B对应于第二阈值。
其中，SCI指示的资源可以理解为SCI所指示的预留资源。也就是SCI中指示的资源中在发送SCI的时刻还没有被使用的资源。
通常SCI指示的资源对应的信号质量测量值可以采用SCI对应的信号质量测量值，即SCI指示的资源对应的信号质量测量值可以为SCI调度的PSSCH承载的DMRS的信号质量测量值，也可以是SCI所在的PSCCH承载的DMRS的信号质量测量值，不予限制。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源为可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源为不可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
方法4
在第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。其中，预设条件为：与根据第一信息确定的LTE-V的传输所占用的资源有重叠，且信号质量测量值大于第二阈值，候选资源是第一终端为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
换句话说，当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源均为可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的可以用于传输控制信息的候选资源中一个或多个候选资源为不可用资源时，第一终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
方法4中各个术语的解释可以参考方法3，在此不再赘述。
方法5
在第一资源不满足预设条件时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。其中，预设条件为：与根据第一信息确定的LTE-V的传输所占用的资源有重叠，且信号质量测量值大于第三阈值。
可选地，第一资源为第一时隙的P个符号的一个PRB。
这里的第三阈值可以与上文的第一阈值不同。可选地，第三阈值小于上文的第一阈值。
可选地，第三阈值属于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合。可以理解为，第三阈值所属的阈值表格或阈值集合与第一阈值所属的阈值表格或阈值集合不同，或者第三阈值所属的阈值表格或阈值集合相对于第一阈值所属的阈值表格或阈值集合是独立设置和/或配置的。
可选地，第三阈值是绝对阈值。可以理解为，第三阈值不是通过阈值表格或阈值集合配置的，可以是一个独立的阈值。可选地，第三阈值可以根据CBR确定。例如在资源池拥塞的情况下，第三阈值更低，则候选资源集合中资源个数更少，进而达到环节资源拥塞程度的目的。
这里的预设条件也可以描述为：
条件1：接收到SCI，且该SCI包括时域资源指示信息、频域资源指示信息、资源预留字段、以及优先级字段。
条件2：SCI指示的资源对应的信号质量测量值高于阈值C。
条件3：第一资源与SCI中指示的资源有重叠。
其中，阈值C对应于第三阈值。
其中第三阈值是根据条件1中的优先级和待发送控制信息的优先级所确定的。
通常SCI指示的资源对应的信号质量测量值可以采用SCI对应的信号质量测量值，即SCI指示的资源对应的信号质量测量值可以为SCI调度的PSSCH承载的DMRS的信号质量测量值，也可以是SCI所在的PSCCH承载的DMRS的信号质量测量值，不予限制。
可选地，条件2也可以替换为：获取了SCI指示的资源的能量的测量值，且第一资源所在时域单元上的能量的测量值高于一个阈值。其中，能量的测量值可以是RSSI、RINR、SNR中的至少一个来表示。这里一个阈值可以和优先级无关，也可以是和待发送控制信息的优先级有关。这里第一资源所在时域单元上的能量的测量值对应SCI指示的资源的能量的测量值。SCI指示的资源的能量的测量值可以转换为第一资源所在时域单元上的能量的测量值。能量的测量值也可以替换为测量能量。
可选地，条件2还可以替换为：获取了SCI指示的资源的能量的测量值，并且第一资源的能量的测量值高于一个阈值。这里第一资源的能量的测量值对应SCI指示的资源的能量的测量值。SCI指示的资源的能量的测量值可以转换为第一资源的能量的测量值。其中，能量的测量值可以是RSSI，RINR，SNR中的至少一个。这里一个阈值可以和优先级无关，也可以是和待发送控制信息的优先级有关。能量的测量值也可以替换为测量能量。
换句话说，第一终端直接根据预设条件判断第一资源是否为可用资源。当第一资源不按满足上述预设条件时第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。当第一资源满足上述预设条件时，第一终端确定第一资源为不可用资源。
需要说明的是，上述个预设条件的描述方式仅为示例，也可以采用其他描述方式，只要该方式所表达的条件与上述预设条件相同即可。还需要说明的是，上文采用候选资源或第一资源“不满足预设条件”的否定方式对本申请的方案进行描述，也可以替换为候选资源或第一资源“满足某个或某些条件”的肯定方式，这里的某个或某些条件为上文预设条件的补集。
方法6
在第一资源与根据第一信息确定的LTE-V的传输所占用的资源不重叠时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。
或者，在第一资源所在的候选资源与根据第一信息确定的LTE-V的传输所占用的资源不重叠时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。
或者，在第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均与根据第一信息确定的LTE-V的传输所占用的资源不重叠时，第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源。
上述方法中，SCI包括的优先级字段也可以替换为PPPP字段。
候选资源的描述可以参考方法1至方法4，在此不再赘述。
需要说明的是，在第一终端确定第一资源为可用资源时，除了第一信息外，也可以使用用于指示第二通信协议的传输所占用的资源的资源指示信息。即第一终端根据第一信息和来自第二通信协议的传输的资源指示信息来确定第一资源为可用资源或不可用资源。本申请中不予限制。
步骤1030，第一终端使用R18 NR-V在第一资源上传输控制信息。
在上述技术方案中，第一终端可以根据第一信息确定LTE-V的传输所占用的资源， 进而根据LTE-V的传输所占用的资源确定第一资源池中的第一资源为可用资源，并使用R18 NR-V在第一资源上传输控制信息。这样，通过上述技术方案，在R18 NR-V的资源池包含和LTE-V相同的时频资源集合的情况下，第一终端在确定传输R18 NR-V的控制信息的可用资源时考虑LTE-V的传输所占用的资源，可以避免使用LTE-V的传输所占用的资源传输R18 NR-V的控制信息，从而有助于避免LTE-V的传输和R18 NR-V的传输发生资源冲突。此外，通过上述技术方案可以实现R18 NR-V的控制信息的发送，从而有助于提高R18 NR-V的数据的传输的可靠性。
一些实现方式中，第一资源可以用于传输数据或控制信息。在此情况下，当确定第一资源为可用资源时，第一资源用于传输控制信息，而不用于传输数据；当确定第一资源为不可用资源时，第一资源可以用于传输数据，而不用于传输控制信息。这样，可以提高资源利用率。
在另一些实现方式中，第一资源不用于传输数据。在此情况下，当确定第一资源为可用资源时，第一资源用于传输控制信息，而不用于传输数据；当确定第一资源为不可用资源时，第一资源不用于传输数据，也不用于传输控制信息。由于收发双方的终端对LTE-V的传输的感知结果不一定相同，这样有可能会出现收发双方的终端对于第一资源是否可用的判定结果不同的情况，会导致收发冲突(例如，接收数据和发送HARQ信息冲突、或者接收HARQ信息和发送数据冲突)。第一资源不用于传输数据则可以避免收发冲突。
需要说明的是，与第一终端对应的数据的接收方法可以参考现有技术，在此不再详述。
图14是本申请提供的数据的发送方法1300的示意图。方法1300可以应用于上述图1所示的网络架构中，但不作限定。方法1300可以由第二终端执行，也可以由应用于第二终端的模块或单元执行，为了描述方便，下文统一称为第二终端。方法1300可以包括以下内容的至少部分内容。
步骤1310，第二终端获取第一信息。
其中，第一信息是LTE-V的传输的相关信息，用于确定第一资源池中LTE-V的传输所占用的资源。第一资源池为R18 NR-V的资源池。
第二终端获取第一信息的方式与第一终端获取第一信息的方式相同，可以参考上文的步骤1010的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
步骤1320，第二终端根据第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源。
第二终端根据第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源的方式与第一终端根据第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源的方式相同，可以参考上文的步骤1020的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
步骤1330，第二终端根据第一资源确定第二资源。
在一些实现方式中，当第一资源为不可用资源时，第二终端可以确定与第一资源对应的第一候选资源也为不可用资源，其中第一候选资源为可以用于传输数据的资源，即用于传输PSSCH的资源。当第一资源为可用资源时，第二终端可以使用与该第一资源相应的PSSCH资源传输数据；当第一资源为不可用资源时，第二终端不可以使用与第一资源相应的PSSCH资源传输数据。在此情况下，若第二终端已经选择第一候选资源来传输数据，则第二终端可以重新选择用于传输数据的资源。换句话说，第二终端在选择用于传输数据的第二资源时，第二资源满足：第二资源为可用资源，且第二资源对应的控制资源也为可 用资源。例如，结合图12，假设PSFCH资源的配置周期为N＝2(即每2个时隙中有一个时隙包含PSFCH资源，例如图12中的逻辑时隙1、3、5、7、9)、以及k＝3，若第二终端确定逻辑时隙5包括的PSFCH资源为不可用资源，则第二终端确定逻辑时隙2包括的PSSCH资源为不可用资源。
在另一些实现方式中，当第一资源为不可用资源、与第一资源相应的用于传输数据的PSSCH资源可用时，第二终端可以降低选择该PSSCH资源的优先级。换句话说，在为传输数据而选择资源时，第二终端优先选择对应的PSFCH资源为可用资源的PSSCH资源。换句话说，在为PSSCH传输进行资源选择时，第二终端确定的候选资源集合包括第一类候选资源和第二类候选资源。第一类候选资源满足条件：候选资源为可用资源；第二类候选资源满足条件：候选资源为可用资源，候选资源对应的控制资源为可用资源。当第二终端确定的待发送数据的控制信息(例如，HARQ)反馈机制使能时，第二终端在第二类候选资源中选择资源。当第二终端确定的待发送数据的控制信息(例如，HARQ)反馈机制未使能时，第二终端在第一类候选资源或候选资源集合中选择资源。该实现方法可以有效支持第二终端在发送数据时可以使能控制信息(例如，HARQ)反馈机制，进而保证数据传输的可靠性。
一种可能的实现方式，第二终端根据第一资源，确定第一候选资源集合，该第一候选资源集合是第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源集合；第二终端从该第一候选资源集合中确定第二资源。即第二终端所确定的第一候选资源集合满足：第一候选资源集合中的资源为可用资源，该资源对应的控制资源也为可用资源。
换句话说，第一资源对应的第二资源为第一候选资源集合中的资源，而第一候选资源集合是第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源集合。
另一种可能的实现方式，第二终端确定第二候选资源集合，第二候选资源集合是第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源集合；第二终端根据第一资源，从第二候选资源集合中确定第二资源。即第二终端按照上述术语解释部分介绍的“选择用于传输PSSCH的资源的方式”确定第二候选资源集合，此时第二候选资源集合中的资源为可用资源，第二候选资源集合中的资源对应的控制资源可以为可用资源，也可以为不可用资源；然后第二终端根据第一资源从第二候选资源集合中选择第二资源。即第二终端在第二候选资源集合中的对应的控制资源为可用资源的资源中，选择第二资源。这样，第二资源为可用资源，同时第二资源对应的控制资源也为可用资源。
需要说明的是，由于第一资源是根据第一信息确定的，因此第二终端根据第一资源确定第二资源，也可以理解为，第二终端根据第一信息确定第二资源。步骤1340，第二终端使用第二通信协议在第二资源上发送第一数据。
在方法1300中，第二终端可以根据第一信息确定LTE-V的传输所占用的资源，进而根据LTE-V的传输所占用的资源确定第一资源为可用资源，并根据第一资源确定传输R18 NR-V的数据的第二资源。换句话说，第二终端确定用于传输R18 NR-V的数据的第二资源同时满足：第二资源为可用资源，以及与第二资源对应的用于传输R18 NR-V的控制信息的资源为可用资源。这样，通过上述技术方案，第二终端在确定传输R18 NR-V的控制信息的可用资源时考虑LTE-V的传输所占用的资源，可以避免使用LTE-V的传输所占用的资源传输R18 NR-V的控制信息，从而有助于避免LTE-V的传输和R18 NR-V的传输发 生资源冲突。此外，第二资源同时满足：第二资源为可用资源，以及与第二资源对应的用于传输R18 NR-V的控制信息的资源为可用资源，可以保证控制信息(例如，HARQ)反馈机制的正常传输，从而有助于提高R18 NR-V的数据的传输的可靠性。
一些实现方式中，第一资源可以用于传输数据或控制信息。在此情况下，当确定第一资源为可用资源时，第一资源用于传输控制信息，而不用于传输数据；当确定第一资源为不可用资源时，第一资源可以用于传输数据，而不用于传输控制信息。这样，可以提高资源利用率。
在另一些实现方式中，第一资源不用于传输数据。在此情况下，当确定第一资源为可用资源时，第一资源用于传输控制信息，而不用于传输数据；当确定第一资源为不可用资源时，第一资源不用于传输数据，也不用于传输控制信息。由于收发双方的终端对LTE-V的传输的感知结果不一定相同，这样有可能会出现收发双方的终端对于第一资源是否可用的判定结果不同的情况，会导致收发冲突(例如，接收数据和发送HARQ信息冲突、或者接收HARQ信息和发送数据冲突)。第一资源不用于传输数据则可以避免收发冲突。
在一些实现方式中，若第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源，且在第一资源对应的PSSCH资源上传数据，则第二终端可以使能控制信息反馈。换句话说，第二终端在PSSCH资源上传输数据，PSSCH资源相应的第一资源为可用资源，则第二终端可以使能控制信息的反馈。若第二终端确定第一资源为不可用资源和/或不在第一资源对应的PSSCH资源上传数据，则第二终端可以去使能控制信息反馈。这样，有助于避免接收控制信息时受到干扰。
具体地，若第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源，且在第一资源对应的PSSCH资源上传数据，则第二终端可以向第一终端发送第二信息，其中，第二信息用于指示第一终端向第二终端发送控制信息。这里也可以理解为，第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源，在第一资源对应的PSSCH资源上传输数据和第二信息，其中第二信息用于指示第一终端向第二终端发送控制信息。例如，第二终端确定第一资源为可用资源，在第一资源对应的第二资源上传输第二信息和数据，其中，第二信息包括HARQ使能信息。
可选地，第二信息承载于第二级SCI中。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的HARQ使能信息，控制信息为HARQ信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括HARQ使能信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送该数据对应的HARQ信息，即控制信息为HARQ信息。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的CSI触发信息，控制信息为CSI反馈信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括CSI触发信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送CSI反馈信息，即控制信息为CSI反馈信息。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的资源冲突指示信息的触发信息，控制信息为资源冲突指示信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括资源冲突指示信息的触发信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送资源冲突指示信息，即控制信息为资源冲突指示信息。
示例性地，HARQ使能信息，CSI触发信息在第二级SCI中指示。
示例性地，资源冲突指示信息的触发信息在第一级SCI中指示。资源冲突指示信息的触发信息可以是第一级SCI中的时域资源指示和频域资源指示信息。
图15是本申请提供的控制信息的接收方法1400的示意图。方法1400可以应用于上述图1所示的网络架构中，但不作限定。方法1400可以由第二终端执行，也可以由应用于第二终端的模块或单元执行，为了描述方便，下文统一称为第二终端。方法1400可以包括以下内容的至少部分内容。
步骤1410，第二终端使用第二通信协议在第二资源上向第一终端发送第一数据。
在方法1400中，对于步骤1410的实现方式不做具体限定。
一种可能的实现方式，第二终端采用如图14所示的方法向第一终端发送第一数据。详细描述可以参见方法1300。
另一种可能的实现方式，第二终端采用上述术语解释部分介绍的“选择用于传输PSSCH的资源的方式”向第一终端发送第一数据。
步骤1420，第二终端向第一终端发送与第一数据对应的第二信息。
其中，第二信息用于指示第一终端发送控制信息。
第一数据对应的第二信息，可以理解为，与第一数据同时发送的第二信息、第二信息用于调度第一数据、第二信息用于触发接收第一数据的终端(即第一终端)发送与第一数据相关的控制信息(例如，HARQ信息、资源冲突指示信息、CSI反馈信息等)。例如，第二信息为调度承载第一数据的PSSCH的PSCCH。
可选地，第二信息承载于第二级SCI中。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的HARQ使能信息，控制信息为HARQ信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括HARQ使能信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送该数据对应的HARQ信息，即控制信息为HARQ信息。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的CSI触发信息，控制信息为CSI反馈信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括CSI触发信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送CSI反馈信息，即控制信息为CSI反馈信息。
可选地，第二信息为SCI中的资源冲突指示信息的触发信息，控制信息为资源冲突指示信息。可以理解为，若第一终端接收来自第二终端的数据和第二信息(包括资源冲突指示信息的触发信息)，则第一终端向第二终端发送资源冲突指示信息，即控制信息为资源冲突指示信息。
示例性地，HARQ使能信息，CSI触发信息在第二级SCI中指示。
示例性地，资源冲突指示信息的触发信息在第一级SCI中指示。资源冲突指示信息的触发信息可以是第一级SCI中的时域资源指示和频域资源指示信息。
步骤1430，第二终端获取第一信息。
其中，第一信息是LTE-V的传输的相关信息，用于确定第一资源池中LTE-V的传输所占用的资源。第一资源池为R18 NR-V的资源池。
步骤1440，第二终端根据第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源。
步骤1430-1440可以参考步骤1310-1320，在此不再再赘述。
步骤1450，第二终端使用第二通信协议在第一资源上接收控制信息。
需要说明的是，本申请仅需要步骤1430-1440在步骤1450之前执行，并不限定步骤1410、1420、1430以及1440的先后顺序。
作为一个示例，步骤1430-1440可以在步骤1420之前执行。例如，在步骤1410中第 二终端采用如图14所示的方法向第一终端发送第一数据，即步骤1430-1440通过步骤1410实现。需要说明的是，在此情况下，在步骤1410后以及步骤1450之前，第二终端可以不再重复执行步骤1430和步骤1440。当然，为了结果的准确性，第二终端也可以再次执行步骤1430-1440。
作为另一个示例，步骤1430-1440可以在步骤1420之后执行。
在上述技术方案中，第二终端指示第一终端向第二终端发送控制信息，根据第一信息确定LTE-V的传输所占用的资源，并在根据LTE-V的传输所占用的资源确定第一资源为可用资源时，在第一资源上接收R18 NR-V的控制信息。这样，通过上述技术方案，第二终端在确定传输R18 NR-V的控制信息的可用资源时考虑LTE-V的传输所占用的资源，可以避免使用LTE-V的传输所占用的资源传输R18 NR-V的控制信息，从而有助于避免LTE-V的传输和R18 NR-V的传输发生资源冲突。
此外，通过上述技术方案可以实现R18 NR-V的控制信息的接收，从而有助于提高R18NR-V的数据的传输的可靠性。
一些实现方式中，第一资源可以用于传输数据或控制信息。在此情况下，当确定第一资源为可用资源时，第一资源用于传输控制信息，而不用于传输数据；当确定第一资源为不可用资源时，第一资源可以用于传输数据，而不用于传输控制信息。这样，可以提高资源利用率。
在另一些实现方式中，第一资源不用于传输数据。在此情况下，当确定第一资源为可用资源时，第一资源用于传输控制信息，而不用于传输数据；当确定第一资源为不可用资源时，第一资源不用于传输数据，也不用于传输控制信息。由于收发双方的终端对LTE-V的传输的感知结果不一定相同，这样有可能会出现收发双方的终端对于第一资源是否可用的判定结果不同的情况，会导致收发冲突(例如，接收数据和发送HARQ信息冲突、或者接收HARQ信息和发送数据冲突)。第一资源不用于传输数据则可以避免收发冲突。
需要说明的是，上述方法1000、方法1300和方法1400可以单独实施，也可以以恰当的方式结合在一起实施。
下面对本申请提供的另一控制信息的发送方法、以及对应的控制信息的接收方法进行描述。该方法可以应用于第一通信协议与第二通信协议共享第一资源池，同时第一资源池又与第三通信协议的第二资源池采用时分复用或频分复用的方式共享频谱的场景。本申请不限定第一通信协议、第二通信协议与第三通信协议的具体类型，下文以第一通信协议为LTE-V、第二通信协议为R18 NR-V、第三通信协议为R16 NR-V为例进行描述。
图16是第一资源池与第二资源池采用时分复用的方式共享频谱的一个示例。LTE-V的第一资源池和R16 NR-V的第二资源池时分复用，其中，LTE-V的第一资源池包括物理时隙1、2、4、5、7、8，R16 NR-V的第二资源池包括物理时隙0、3、6、9。LTE-V和R18NR-V共享第一资源池，R18 NR-V通过动态的方式获取资源。
图17是R16 NR-V PSSCH资源与PSFCH资源映射关系的一个示例。
如图17所示，在R16 NR-V的第二资源池上配置了周期N＝2的PSFCH资源，R16 NR-V的数据传输在相应的PSFCH资源上进行反馈。假设PSSCH到PSFCH的最小时间间隔k＝2，资源池2内的子信道的个数为3、时隙个数为4(即物理时隙0、3、6、9)、子信道包含10个PRB、可用于传输HARQ信息的PRB为30个(编号0-29)、配置用于 传输HARQ信息的PRB个数为12(编号0-11)。这样，每个子信道可以对应2个资源块。例如，子信道(0，0)对应于逻辑时隙3(即物理时隙9)中的PRB0和PRB1。
图18是本申请提供的控制信息的发送方法1700的示意图。方法1700可以应用于上述图1所示的网络架构中，但不作限定。方法1700可以由第一终端执行，也可以由应用于第一终端的模块或单元执行，为了描述方便，下文统一称为第一终端。
在方法1700中，R18 NR-V终端可以使用第一资源池中的资源接收数据，使用R16NR-V的第二资源池中的控制资源发送控制信息。具体地，R18 NR-V可以使用R16 NR-V的控制资源中的剩余资源来发送控制信息。
这里的剩余资源可以包括以下两种。
第1种是R16 NR-V的控制资源中上没有被配置为用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的资源，即R16 NR-V的控制资源中与被配置为用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的资源频分复用的资源。示例性地，参考图16，R16 NR-V的控制资源包含30个PRB，但是只有12个PRB(如图16中的PRB0至PRB11)被配置用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息，这样剩余的18个PRB(如图16中的PRB12至PRB29)均可用于传输R18 NR-V的控制信息。
第2种是被配置为用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的资源中，除实际用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的资源以外的剩余资源，即R16 NR-V的控制资源中与被配置为用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的资源频分复用或码分复用的资源。例如，假设CS对的数量为3，用于传输PSFCH只需要一个PRB，每个子信道对应了2个PRB，则每个子信道对应6(2*CS对的数量)个资源(包含频域维度和码域维度)，未用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的资源可能还剩5个、6个或不确定。例如，对于R16 NR-V的单播、反馈方式为NACK only的组播等来说，未用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的资源还剩5个。又例如，对于R16NR-V的广播来说，没有用于传输控制信息的资源还剩6个。又例如，对于反馈方式为ACK/NACK的组播，组内每个成员终端都需要一个专有的资源发送ACK或NACK，在此情况下则可能没有剩余资源，这取决于组成员的个数即组大小。又例如，被配置为用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的资源中，用于传输PSSCH的资源对应的用于传输PSFCH的资源不止一个，除实际用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的资源以外的剩余资源包括频域资源和/或码域资源。可选地，上述用于传输R18 NR-V的控制信息的控制资源可以为预配置的或者由网络设备配置的。例如，用于传输R18 NR-V的控制信息的PRB集合可以使用位图(bitmap)预配置或者由基站配置。
为了描述方便，下文将R16 NR-V的控制资源中上被配置为用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的资源构成的集合称为第一资源集合，将R16 NR-V的控制资源中上被配置为用于传输R18 NR-V的控制信息的资源所构成的集合称为第二资源集合。需要说明的是，第二资源集合与第一资源集合可以是独立配置的，例如，通过不同的参数配置的。
具体地，方法1700可以包括以下内容的至少部分内容。
步骤1710，第一终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源。
其中，控制资源集合为R16 NR-V的第二资源池中的控制资源的集合。该控制资源集合中的第一资源集合被配置为用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息。第三资源与第一资源集合中的资源不同。
一种可能的实现方式，第三资源与第一资源集合中的资源频分复用和/或码分复用。
可选地，上述控制资源集合为R16 NR-V的控制资源集合，即上述控制资源集合为第一资源集合，可以理解为，R18 NR-V的控制资源集合与R16 NR-V的控制资源集合相同，此时第三资源与第一资源集合中的资源可以频分复用，也可以码分复用，还可以既频分复用有码分复用。在此情况下，由于第一终端利用R16 NR-V的控制资源集合中与被配置为传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的资源不同的资源来传输R18 NR-V的控制信息，因此可以提高频谱的利用效率。
可选地，上述控制资源集合包括第一资源集合和第二资源集合，其中第一资源集合为R16 NR-V的控制资源集合，第二资源集合为R18 NR-V的控制资源集合。第三资源属于第二资源集合。第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源频分复用。换句话说，第二资源集合与第一资源集合在频域上没有交集。
例如，第一资源集合包括PRB0、PRB1、和PRB2，第二资源集合包括PRB5、PRB6、和PRB7。
可选地，上述控制资源集合包括第一资源集合和第二资源集合。其中第一资源集合为R16 NR-V的控制资源集合，第二资源集合为R18 NR-V的控制资源集合。第三资源属于第二资源集合。第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源频分复用，或者第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源频域相同、码域不同。
例如，第一资源集合包括PRB0、PRB1、和PRB2，第二资源集合包括PRB2、PRB3、和PRB4。这样PRB2既可以用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息又可以用于传输第三通信协议的控制信息，为了区分，此时第二通信协议的PRB2和第三通信协议的PRB2可以码分复用。第二资源集合中的PRB0和PRB1与第二资源集合中的资源频分复用。
在一些实现方式中，控制资源集合中的第二资源集合与所述第一资源集合是独立配置的，所述第二资源集合中的资源用于传输R18 NR-V的控制信息，所述第三资源属于所述第二资源集合。
示例性地，第二资源集合是用于传输R18 NR-V的HARQ的资源的集合。第一资源集合是用于传输R16 NR-V的HARQ的资源的集合。可选地，第二资源集合可以为第一资源集合，这种情况下，第二资源集合的配置信令即为配置第一资源集合的信令。可选地，第二资源集合可以和第一资源集合不同，这种情况下，第二资源集合使用信令配置。其中，第二资源集合的配置参数与第一资源集合的配置参数不同。
示例性地，第二资源集合是用于传输R18 NR-V的HARQ的资源的集合。第一资源集合是用于传输R17NR-V的HARQ的资源的集合。第三资源集合是用于传输R17NR-V的资源冲突指示信息的资源的集合。可选地，第二资源集合可以为第一资源集合，这种情况下，第二资源集合的配置信令即为配置第一资源集合的信令。可选地，第二资源集合可以为第三资源集合，这种情况下，第二资源集合的配置信令即为配置第三资源集合的信令。可选地，第二资源集合可以和第一资源集合，第三资源集合不同，这种情况下，第二资源集合使用信令配置。其中，第二资源集合的配置参数与第一资源集合和第三资源集合的配置参数不同。
第一终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源，需要确定第三资源的时域资源、频域资源和码域资源。假设第一终端已知下述信息：第一资源池、以及第一资源池与物理时隙的映射关系；第一资源池为和LTE-V的共享资源池；以及第二资源池和物理时隙的映射关系。
方式1
在方式1中，第二资源集合中的资源与第一资源集合中的资源可以频分复用。
1)第一终端确定第三资源的时域资源
假设第一终端在第四资源上接收数据，第一终端可以根据第三资源、以及第一映射关系，确定第三资源的时域资源。其中，第一映射关系包括第一物理时隙与第二物理时隙的映射关系，第一物理时隙为第四资源包括的最后一个物理时隙(即第四资源的结束位置所在物理时隙)，第二物理时隙为与第一物理时隙满足第一时间间隔的第一个包含控制资源的物理时隙，第二物理时隙在第一物理时隙之后。所述第一时间间隔的单位可以是物理时隙。可选地，所述第一时间间隔的取值范围可以是2或3。
可选地，第一时间间隔是预配置、预定义或者由基站配置的。
这里使用物理时隙是因为R16 NR-V的PSSCH到PSFCH的映射关系是根据第二资源池内的逻辑时隙确定，而R18 NR-V的第一资源池也有自身的逻辑时隙索引，这会导致第一资源池的逻辑时隙的索引和第二资源池的逻辑时隙的索引无法直接互相关联。但是第一资源池和第二资源池都与物理时隙具有映射关系，因此可以根据物理时隙确定第一资源池中的PSSCH资源到R16 NR-V的第二资源池中的PSFCH资源的映射关系。
例如，假设第四资源包括的最后一个物理时隙为物理时隙n，在满足PSSCH-to-控制信息的最小处理时延k的情况下，选择第二资源池中最近的存在PSFCH资源的物理时隙进行控制信息的传输。其中PSSCH-to-控制信息的最小处理时延k的取值可以预配置或者由基站配置。
图19是PSSCH资源与PSFCH资源映射关系的一个示例。
如图19所示，假设k＝2，LTE-V的逻辑时隙0至逻辑时隙5中的时隙，满足时隙n+2或之后第一个包含PSFCH的时隙为物理时隙9的时隙有4个，即LTE-V中逻辑时隙为1、2、3、4的时隙(相应的物理时隙索引分别为2、4、5、7)。这样，当第四资源包括的最后一个物理时隙为物理时隙2、4、5、或7时，则对应的传输控制信息的时隙为物理时隙9。
需要说明的是，由于第一资源池是共享资源池，无法确定第一资源池内的某个子信道是被LTE-V使用还是R18 NR-V使用，因此在进行PSSCH到PSFCH的映射时，无法单独将用于传输R18 NR-V的数据的资源和R16 NR-V的PSFCH资源进行映射，因此第一资源池中的资源(包括用于传输LTE-V的数据的资源或R18 NR-V的数据的资源)均需映射到R16 NR-V的PSFCH资源中。
2)第一终端确定第三资源的频域资源
假设第一终端在第四资源上接收数据，第一终端根据第四资源、以及第二映射关系，确定第三资源的频域资源。其中，第二映射关系包括第四资源的频域资源与第三资源的频域资源的映射关系。
可选地，第二映射关系可以是通过下述方式确定的。具体地，第一终端中预配置或由基站为第一终端配置了的PRB集合(第二资源集合)，第一终端在这个PRB集合中的一个PRB上进行PSFCH的传输，这里的PRB集合属于第1种剩余资源。第一终端为在逻辑时隙i和子信道j对应的资源上传输的数据分配的反馈资源的PRB满足下述区间：
其中，为与PSFCH时隙相关联的PSSCH时隙的个数，是每个子信道对应的PRB的个数，为PRB集合中的PRB个数，Nsubch为子信道的个数，0≤j＜Nsubch。
示例性地，第二资源集合中的资源，和第一资源集合中的资源均满足频分复用的关系。此时在上述区间对应的PRB集合中，第三资源使用的PRB满足下述公式：
其中 是CS对数。的取值为1或当PSFCH资源关联到PSSCH资源的起始子信道时，当PSFCH资源关联到PSSCH资源包括的全部子信道时，PID是调度PSSCH的第二级SCI中包含的物理层源ID。当调度数据的第二级SCI中的播类型指示字段的取值为“01”时，MID是接收数据的终端的高层指示的标识，否则MID＝0。
当控制信息为资源冲突指示信息时，MID＝0。PID是被提供资源冲突指示信息的，被指示预留资源有冲突的终端的第二级SCI中包含的物理层源ID。
第二资源集合中的资源和第一资源集合中的资源有重叠时。第三资源使用的PRB满足下述公式：
其中 是CS对数。的取值为1或当PSFCH资源关联到PSSCH资源的起始子信道时，当PSFCH资源关联到PSSCH资源包括的全部子信道时，PID是调度PSSCH的第二级SCI中包含的物理层源ID。当调度数据的第二级SCI中的播类型指示字段的取值为“01”时，MID是接收数据的终端的高层指示的标识，否则MID＝0。Δ为一个常数，且Δ取值范围为示例性地，Δ＝1。
此时Δ可以保证第三资源和用于传输第三通信协议HARQ的资源是频分复用或码分复用的。避免了资源冲突。
3)第一终端确定第三资源的码域资源
一种可能的实现方式，第一终端根据第一CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源，其中，第一CS对表格为R16 NR-V的CS对表格。
该第一CS对表格可以如表3所示。
表3
具体地，考虑到码域维度，第一终端为时隙i和子信道j分配的PRB的数量满足：
其中，是CS对数，表示是根据PSSCH占用的初始子信道来确定可传输HARQ信息的资源，还是根据PSSCH占用的全部子信道来确定可传输控制信息的资源， 也就是说或其中，满足上述表格1。
方式2
在方式2中，第二资源集合中的资源与第一资源集合中的资源可以即支持频分复用又支持码分复用，也可以仅码分复用。
第一终端确定第三资源的时域资源和频域资源的方式可以参考方式1，在此不再赘述。
下面对第一终端确定第三资源的码域资源的方式进行描述。
由于R18 NR-V无法获知R16 NR-V的传输是单播、组播、或广播，因此R18 NR-V无法获知被配置为传输R16 NR-V的HARQ信息的PSFCH资源中是否有剩余资源。若R16 NR-V将对PSFCH资源的占用情况发送给R18 NR-V，R18 NR-V再根据得到的信息确定用于传输HARQ信息的资源，考虑到R18 NR-V和R16 NR-V之间的传输时延，R18 NR-V可能没法工作或者工作效率低。在此情况下，本申请可以通过为R18 NR-V和R16 NR-V分配不同的码域资源，来避免R18 NR-V影响R16 NR-V的控制信息传输，提高传输控制信息的可靠性。
具体地，第一终端可以根据第二CS对表格确定第三资源的码域资源。其中，第二CS对表格可以是预配置或由基站配置的，第二CS表格与第一CS表格不同。可选地，第二CS对表格中第一CS对数对应的CS对与R16 NR-V所使用的第一CS对表格中第一CS对数对应的CS对不同，换句话说，对应于同一CS对数，R18 NR-V和R16 NR-V对应于不同的CS对。
在一些实现方式中，R18 NR-V的CS对数的最大数量为W。W可以是RRC配置的(网络设备使用RRC参数配置)，或者是预定义的，或者是预配置的。示例性的，W为6或3。
其中，R18 NR-V的CS对包含下述情况的至少一个：
1)CS对数为1：R16 NR-V使用第一CS对，第一CS对指示取值1和取值2(取值2为和取值1成对的CS值)。R18 NR-V使用第二CS对，第二CS对指示取值3和取值4(取值4为和取值3成对的CS值)。取值1和取值3不同。
示例性地，CS对为(A，B)，其中CS对的索引可以只指示A，B是和A成对的CS取值。
例如，取值1为0，取值3可以为2、3、4、5中的任意一个。例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，取值1为0，取值2为6；第二CS对为(3，9)，即取值3为3，取值4为9。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间的正交性最好，R18 NR-V的传输和R16 NR-V的传输之间的干扰情况小。
又例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，第二CS对为(2，8)。又例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，第一CS对为(4，10)。又例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，第一CS对为(5，11)。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间还是有一定的正交性，尽可能的减少R18 NR-V的传输和R16 NR-V的传输之间的干扰。
2)CS对数为2：R16 NR-V使用第一CS对，第一CS对指示取值5(对应的成对CS为取值6)，取值7(对应的成对的CS为取值8)。R18 NR-V使用第二CS对，第二CS对指示取值9(对应的成对CS为取值10)，取值11(对应的成对CS为取值12)。其中，取值5和取值7，与取值9和取值11不同。
例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(2，8)，(4，10)，(5，11)中的任意两个。示例性地，第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(2，8)，或者，第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(2，8)，(4，10)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(4，10)，(5，11)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(2，8)，(5，11)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(5，11)，或者第一CS对为(0，6)，(3，9)，第二CS对为(1，7)，(4，10)。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间还是有一定的正交性，尽可能的减少R18 NR-V的传输和R16 NR-V的传输之间的干扰。
3)CS对数为3：R16 NR-V使用第一CS对，第一CS对指示取值12(对应的成对CS为取值13)，取值14(对应的成对的CS为取值15)，取值16(对应的成对CS为取值17)。R18 NR-V使用第二CS对，第二CS对指示取值17(对应的成对CS为取值18)，取值19(对应的成对CS为取值20)，取值21(对应的成对CS为取值22)。其中，取值12，取值14和取值16，与取值17，取值19和取值21不同。
例如，第一CS对为(0，6)，(2，8)，(4，10)；第二CS对为(1，7)，(3，9)，(5，11)。此时第一CS对和第二CS对之间还是有一定的正交性，尽可能的减少R18 NR-V的传输和R16 NR-V的传输之间的干扰。
可选地，所述CS对可以是RRC配置的，或者预定义的或者是预配置。
第二CS对表格的实现方式有很多，本申请不予限制。例如，第二CS对表格可以包括表4至表6中的至少一个表项(例如第二CS对表格可以包括表4至表6中的至少一行)。表4、表5和表6为R18 NR-V可以采用的CS对表格的示例。
表4
表5
需要说明的是，表4和表5中CS对数为2对应的CS对的两种取值也可以存在于同一张表格中，如表6所示，可以使用CS对数的取值为4来隐式表示实际CS对数为2时的取值。
表6
可选地，可以通过预定义、预配置或由基站配置m′0或Δ的方式来为第一终端配置第二CS对表格，也可以通过预定义、预配置或由基站配置CS对表格的方式直接为第一终端配置第二CS对表格，本申请不予限制。
示例性地，假设为终端配置的CS对数为3，根据表3，R16 NR-V终端将使用CS对0、2、4；根据表4、表5或表6，R18 NR-V终端将使用CS对1、3、5。假设为终端配置的CS对数为2，根据表3，R16 NR-V终端将使用CS对0、3；根据表4或6，R18 NR-V终端将使用CS对1、4，或者根据表5，R18 NR-V终端将使用CS对2、5。
图20是一个子信道对应的频域资源和码域资源的一个示例。
如图20的(a)图所示，若R16 NR-V是12个子信道映射到24个PRB，CS对数为3(0、2、4)，则每个子信道对应6个候选PSFCH资源。
如图20的(b)图所示，若R18 NR-V是24个子信道映射到24个PRB，CS对数为3(1、3、5)，则每个子信道对应3个候选PSFCH资源。
方式3
在方式3中，第二资源集合中的资源与第一资源集合中的资源可以仅频分复用，可以仅码分复用，也可以即支持频分复用又支持码分复用。
第一终端确定第三资源的时域资源和频域资源的方式可以参考方式1，在此不再赘述。
下面对第一终端确定第三资源的码域资源的方式进行描述。
具体地，第一终端根据第三资源的频域资源，确定使用第一CS对表格或第二CS对表格来确定第三资源的码域资源。例如，当第二资源的频域资源属于被配置为用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的PRB集合时，第一终端根据第二CS对表格确定第三资源的码域资源。又例如，当第二资源的频域资源未被配置为用于传输R16 NR-V的控制信息的PRB集合时，第一终端根据第一CS对表格确定第三资源的码域资源。
其中，第一CS对表格和第二CS对表格的描述可以参考方式2，在此不再赘述。
步骤1720，第一终端使用R18 NR-V在第三资源上发送控制信息。
在方法1700中，R18 NR-V终端可以使用第一资源池中的资源接收数据，使用R16 NR-V的控制资源中的剩余资源来发送控制信息。这样，通过上述技术方案，在R18 NR-V的资源池包含和LTE-V相同的时频资源集合的情况下可以实现R18 NR-V的控制信息的发送，从而有助于提高R18 NR-V的数据传输的可靠性。此外，由于利用R16 NR-V的控制资源中的剩余资源来发送R18 NR-V的控制信息，因此可以提高频谱的利用效率。图21是本申请提供的控制信息的接收方法2000的示意图。方法2000可以应用于上述图1所示的网络架构中，但不作限定。方法2000可以由第二终端执行，也可以由应用于第二终端的模块或单元执行，为了描述方便，下文统一称为第二终端。
在方法2000中，R18 NR-V终端可以使用第一资源池中的资源发送数据，使用R16 NR-V的第二资源池中的控制资源接收控制信息。具体地，R18 NR-V可以使用R16 NR-V的控制资源中的剩余资源来接收控制信息。剩余资源的描述可以参考方法1700中的描述，在此不再赘述。
方法2000可以包括以下内容的至少部分内容。
步骤2010，第二终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源。
步骤2020，第二终端使用R18 NR-V在第三资源上接收控制信息。
第二终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源的方式与第一终端从控制资源集合中确定第三资源的方式相同，可以参考上文的步骤1710的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
在方法2000中，R18 NR-V终端可以使用第一资源池中的资源发送数据，使用R16 NR-V的控制资源中的剩余资源来接收控制信息。这样，通过上述技术方案，在R18 NR-V的资源池包含和LTE-V相同的时频资源集合的情况下可以实现R18 NR-V的控制信息的接收，从而有助于提高R18 NR-V的数据传输的可靠性。此外，由于利用R16 NR-V的控制资源中的剩余资源来接收R18 NR-V的控制信息，因此可以提高频谱的利用效率。
需要说明的是，上述方法1700和方法2000可以单独实施，也可以以恰当的方式结合在一起实施。
上文结合图10至图21，详细描述了本申请提供的方法，下面将结合图22至图23，详细描述本申请的装置实施例。可以理解的是，为了实现上述实施例中功能，图22或图23中的装置包括了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到，结合本申请中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及方法步骤，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件相结合的形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用场景和设计约束条件。
图22和图23为本申请的实施例提供的可能的装置的结构示意图。这些装置可以用于实现上述方法实施例中终端的功能，因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。
如图22所示，装置2100包括收发单元2110和处理单元2120。
当装置2100用于实现上述方法实施例中第一终端的功能时，收发单元2110用于：获取第一信息，所述第一信息用于确定第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源。处理单元2120用于：根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源。收发单元2110还用于：使用第二通信协议在所述第一资源上发送控制信息。
可选地，收发单元2110还用于：获取第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端发送所述控制信息。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候选资源是所述第一终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候 选资源是所述第一终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是所述第一终端为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是为所述第一终端传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
可选地，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的连续L个子信道。
可选地，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的P个符号的连续L个子信道，P为大于或者等于1的整数。
可选地，所述第二阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第二阈值是绝对阈值。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第三阈值。
可选地，所述第三阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第三阈值是绝对阈值。
可选地，所述信号质量通过以下信息中的至少一个表征：RSRP、RSSI、SNR、或SINR。
可选地，所述第一资源不用于传输数据。
可选地，所述第一信息包括以下信息中的至少一项：SCI、或所述SCI对应的信号质量测量值，所述SCI包括所述第一通信协议的传输的资源指示信息和/或所述第一通信协议的传输的资源预留字段。
可选地，所述第一通信协议和所述第二通信协议的资源池使用相同的时频资源。
可选地，所述控制信息包括以下至少一项：HARQ信息、CSI反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。
可选地，所述控制信息为所述第一终端成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的ACK信息；或者，所述控制信息为所述第一终端没有成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的NACK信息。
当装置2100用于实现上述方法实施例中第二终端的功能时，收发单元2110用于：获取第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源。处理单元2120用于：根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源，所述第一资源为第二通信协议的用于传输控制信息的资源；以及根据所述第一资源确定第二资源，所述第二资源为第二通信协议的用于传输第一数据的资源。收发单元2110还用于：使用所述第二通信协议在所述第二资源上向第一终端发送所述第一数据。
可选地，收发单元2110还用于：向所述第一终端发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示接收所述第一终端发送控制信息，所述控制信息包括以下至少一项：HARQ信息、CSI反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。
可选地，所述第一资源对应的第二资源为第一候选资源集合中的资源，所述第一候选资源集合是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源集合。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：确定第二候选资源集合，所述第二候选资源集合是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源集合；根据所述第一资源，从所述第二候选资源集合中确定所述第二资源。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候选资源是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候选资源是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
可选地，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的连续L个子信道。
可选地，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的P个符号的连续L个子信道，P为大于或者等于1的整数。
可选地，所述第二阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第二阈值是绝对阈值。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第三阈值。
可选地，所述第三阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第三阈值是绝对阈值。
可选地，所述信号质量通过以下信息中的至少一个表征：RSRP、RSSI、SNR、或SINR。
可选地，所述第一资源不用于传输数据。
可选地，所述第一信息包括以下信息中的至少一项：SCI、或所述SCI对应的信号质量测量值，所述SCI包括所述第一通信协议的传输的资源指示信息和/或所述第一通信协议的传输的资源预留字段。
可选地，所述第一通信协议和所述第二通信协议使用相同的时频资源集合。
或者，当装置2100用于实现上述方法实施例中第二终端的功能时，收发单元2110用于：使用第二通信协议在第二资源上发送第一数据；向第一终端发送与所述第一数据对应的第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端发送控制信息；获取第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源。处理单元2120用于：根据所述第一信息，确定第一资源为可用资源。收发单元2110还用于：使用所述第二通信协议在所述第一资源上接收所述控制信息。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候选资源是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；其中，所述候选资源是所述第二终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；其中，候选资源是为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
可选地，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的连续L个子信道。
可选地，所述候选资源为在第一时隙的P个符号的连续L个子信道，P为大于或者等于1的整数。
可选地，所述第二阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第二阈值是绝对阈值。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：在所述第一资源不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第三阈值。
可选地，所述第三阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，所述第三阈值是绝对阈值。
可选地，所述信号质量通过以下信息中的至少一个表征：RSRP、RSSI、SNR、或SINR。
可选地，所述第一资源不用于传输数据。
可选地，所述第一信息包括以下信息中的至少一项：SCI、或所述SCI对应的信号质量测量值，所述SCI包括所述第一通信协议的传输的资源指示信息和/或所述第一通信协议的传输的资源预留字段。
可选地，所述第一通信协议和所述第二通信协议使用相同的时频资源集合。
或者，当装置2100用于实现上述方法实施例中第一终端的功能时，处理单元2120用于：从控制资源集合中确定第三资源。收发单元2110用于：使用第二通信协议在所述第三资源上发送控制信息。其中，所述控制资源集合中的第一资源集合被配置为用于传输第三通信协议的控制信息，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源不同。
可选地，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源频分复用和/或码分复用。
可选地，收发单元2110还用于：在第四资源上接收数据。处理单元2120具体用于：根据所述第四资源、以及第一映射关系，确定所述第三资源的时域资源；其中，所述第一映射关系包括第一物理时隙与第二物理时隙的映射关系，所述第一物理时隙为所述第四资源包括的最后一个物理时隙，所述第二物理时隙为与所述第一物理时隙满足第一时间间隔的第一个包含控制资源的物理时隙，所述第二物理时隙在所述第一物理时隙之后。
可选地，所述第一时间间隔是预配置、预定义或者由基站配置的。
可选地，收发单元2110还用于：在第四资源上接收数据。处理单元2120具体用于：根据所述第四资源、以及第二映射关系，确定所述第三资源的频域资源；其中，所述第二映射关系包括所述第四资源的频域资源与所述第三资源的频域资源的映射关系。
可选地，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源频分复用。处理单元2120具体用于：根据第一CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源，其中，所述第一CS对表格为所述第三通信协议的CS对表格。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：根据第二循环偏移CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；其中，所述第二CS对表格和所述第三通信协议的第一CS对表格不同。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：当确定所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源频分复用时，根据第一CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；当确定所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源码分复用时，根据第二CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；其中，所述第二CS对表格和所述第三通信协议的第一CS对表格不同。
可选地，所述第二CS对表格中的第一CS对数对应的CS对与第一CS对表格中的所述第一CS对数对应的CS对不同。
可选地，所述第二CS对表格包括以下表格中的至少一个表项：
或者，
或者，
其中，为CS对数。
可选地，第二资源集合与所述第一资源集合是独立配置的，所述第二资源集合中的资源用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息，所述第三资源属于所述第二资源集合。
可选地，所述控制信息包括以下至少一项：HARQ信息、CSI反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。
或者，当装置2100用于实现上述方法实施例中第二终端的功能时，处理单元2120用于：从控制资源集合中确定第三资源。收发单元2110用于：使用第二通信协议在所述第三资源上接收控制信息。其中，所述控制资源集合中的第一资源集合被配置为用于传输第三通信协议的控制信息，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源不同。
可选地，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源频分复用和/或码分复用。
可选地，收发单元2110还用于：在第四资源上发送数据。处理单元2120具体用于：根据所述第四资源、以及第一映射关系，确定所述第三资源的时域资源；其中，所述第一映射关系包括第一物理时隙与第二物理时隙的映射关系，所述第一物理时隙为所述第四资源包括的最后一个物理时隙，所述第二物理时隙为与所述第一物理时隙满足第一时间间隔的第一个包含控制资源的物理时隙，所述第二物理时隙在所述第一物理时隙之后。
可选地，所述第一时间间隔是预配置、预定义或者由基站配置的。
可选地，收发单元2110还用于：在第四资源上发送数据。处理单元2120具体用于：根据所述第四资源、以及第二映射关系，确定所述第三资源的频域资源；其中，所述第二映射关系包括所述第四资源的频域资源与所述第三资源的频域资源的映射关系。
可选地，所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源频分复用，处理单元2120具体用于：根据第一循环偏移CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源，其中，所述第一CS对表格为所述第三通信协议的CS对表格。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：根据第二循环偏移CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；其中，所述第二CS对表格和所述第三通信协议的第一CS对表格不同。
可选地，处理单元2120具体用于：当确定所述第三资源与所述第一资源集合中的资源频分复用时，根据第一CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；当确定所述第三资 源与所述第一资源集合中的资源码分复用时，所述根据第二CS对表格，确定所述第三资源的码域资源；其中，所述第二CS对表格和所述第三通信协议的第一CS对表格不同。
可选地，所述第二CS对表格中的第一CS对数对应的CS对与第一CS对表格中的所述第一CS对数对应的CS对不同。
可选地，所述第二CS对表格包括以下表格中的至少一个表项：
或者，
或者，
其中，为CS对数。
可选地，第二资源集合与所述第一资源集合是独立配置的，所述第二资源集合中的资源用于传输第二通信协议的控制信息，所述第三资源属于所述第二资源集合。
可选地，所述控制信息包括以下至少一项：HARQ信息、CSI反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。
关于上述收发单元2110和处理单元2120更详细的描述，可参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述，在此不再说明。
如图23示，装置2200包括处理器2210和接口电路2220。处理器2210和接口电路2220之间相互耦合。可以理解的是，接口电路2220可以为收发器或输入输出接口。可选地，装置2200还可以包括存储器2230，用于存储处理器2210执行的指令或存储处理器2210运行指令所需要的输入数据或存储处理器2210运行指令后产生的数据。当装置2200用于实现上文所述的方法时，处理器2210用于实现上述处理单元2120的功能，接口电路2220用于实现上述收发单元2110的功能。
当装置2200为应用于第一终端的芯片时，该芯片实现上述方法实施例中第一终端的功能。该芯片从第一终端中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息，该信息是其他装置发送给第一终端的；或者，该芯片向第一终端中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送 信息，该信息是第一终端发送给其他装置的。
当装置2200为应用于第二终端的芯片时，该芯片实现上述方法实施例中第二终端的功能。该芯片从第二终端中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息，该信息是其他装置发送给第二终端的；或者，该芯片向第二终端中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息，该信息是第二终端发送给其他装置的。
本申请还提供一种通信装置，包括处理器，该处理器与存储器耦合，存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令和/或数据，处理器用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，或读取存储器存储的数据，以执行上文各方法实施例中的方法。可选地，处理器为一个或多个。可选地，该通信装置包括存储器。可选地，存储器为一个或多个。可选地，该存储器与该处理器集成在一起，或者分离设置。
本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有用于实现上述各方法实施例中由第一终端执行的方法的计算机指令。
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品，包含指令，该指令被计算机执行时以实现上述各方法实施例中由第一终端执行的方法。
本申请还提供一种通信系统，该通信系统包括上文各实施例中的第一终端和/或第二终端。
上述提供的任一种装置中相关内容的解释及有益效果均可参考上文提供的对应的方法实施例，此处不再赘述。
可以理解的是，本申请的实施例中的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，还可以是其它通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件，硬件部件或者其任意组合。通用处理器可以是微处理器，也可以是任何常规的处理器。
本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以通过硬件的方式来实现，也可以由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成，软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器、闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器、可擦除可编程只读存储器、电可擦除可编程只读存储器、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、CD-ROM或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器，从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息，且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然，存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外，该ASIC可以位于第一终端和/或第二终端中。当然，处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于第一终端和/或第二终端中。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序或指令时，全部或部分地执行本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其它可编程装置。所述计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机程序或指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所 述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带；也可以是光介质，例如，数字视频光盘；还可以是半导体介质，例如，固态硬盘。
在本申请的各个实施例中，如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突，不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用，不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。
可以理解的是，在本申请的实施例中涉及的各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分，并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。
除非另有说明，本申请实施例所使用的所有技术和科学术语与本申请的技术领域的技术人员通常理解的含义相同。本申请中所使用的术语只是为了描述具体的实施例的目的，不是旨在限制本申请的范围。应理解，上述为举例说明，上文的例子仅仅是为了帮助本领域技术人员理解本申请实施例，而非要将申请实施例限制于所示例的具体数值或具体场景。本领域技术人员根据上文所给出的例子，显然可以进行各种等价的修改或变化，这样的修改和变化也落入本申请实施例的范围内。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (40)

  1. 一种控制信息的发送方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    第一终端获取第一信息，所述第一信息用于确定第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源；
    所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源；
    所述第一终端使用第二通信协议在所述第一资源上发送控制信息。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端获取第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端发送所述控制信息。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：
    在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；
    其中，所述候选资源是所述第一终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
  4. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：
    在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；
    其中，所述候选资源是所述第一终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
  5. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：
    在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；
    其中，候选资源是所述第一终端为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
  6. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：
    在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；
    其中，候选资源是为所述第一终端传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
  7. 根据权利要求5或6所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述候选资源为在第一时隙的连续L个子信道。
  8. 根据权利要求5或6所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述候选资源为在第一时隙的P个符号的连续L个子信道，P为大于或者等于1的整数。
  9. 根据权利要求5至8中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，
    所述第二阈值是绝对阈值。
  10. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源，包括：
    在所述第一资源不满足预设条件时，所述第一终端确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第三阈值。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，
    所述第三阈值是绝对阈值。
  12. 根据权利要求3至11中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述信号质量通过以下信息中的至少一个表征：参考信号接收功率RSRP、接收信号强度指示信息RSSI、信号噪声比SNR、或信号噪声干扰比SINR。
  13. 根据权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一资源不用于传输数据。
  14. 根据权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一信息包括以下信息中的至少一项：侧行控制信息SCI、或所述SCI对应的信号质量测量值，所述SCI包括所述第一通信协议的传输的资源指示信息和/或所述第一通信协议的传输的资源预留字段。
  15. 根据权利要求1至14中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一通信协议和所述第二通信协议的资源池使用相同的时频资源。
  16. 根据权利要求1至15中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述控制信息包括以下至少一项：混合自动重传请求HARQ信息、信道状态信息CSI反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。
  17. 根据权利要求1至15中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述控制信息为所述第一终端成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的确认ACK信息；或者，
    所述控制信息为所述第一终端没有成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的否认NACK信息。
  18. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：
    收发单元，用于获取第一信息，所述第一信息用于确定第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第一信息确定第一资源为可用资源；
    所述收发单元，还用于使用第二通信协议在所述第一资源上发送控制信息。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述收发单元，还用于获取第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一终端发送所述 控制信息。
  20. 根据权利要求18或19所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述处理单元，具体用于在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；
    其中，所述候选资源是所述第一终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
  21. 根据权利要求18或19所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述处理单元，具体用于在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第一阈值；
    其中，所述候选资源是所述第一终端为传输数据进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
  22. 根据权利要求18或19所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述处理单元，具体用于在所述第一资源所在的候选资源不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；
    其中，候选资源是所述第一终端为传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或等于1的整数。
  23. 根据权利要求18或19所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述处理单元，具体用于在所述第一资源所在的第一时间单元包括的候选资源均不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第二阈值；
    其中，候选资源是为所述第一终端传输控制信息进行资源选择时的候选资源，所述候选资源为在第一时间单元的连续L个频域单元，L为大于或者等于1的整数。
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述候选资源为在第一时隙的连续L个子信道。
  25. 根据权利要求22或23所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述候选资源为在第一时隙的P个符号的连续L个子信道，P为大于或者等于1的整数。
  26. 根据权利要求22至25中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第二阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，
    所述第二阈值是绝对阈值。
  27. 根据权利要求18或19所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述处理单元，具体用于在所述第一资源不满足预设条件时，确定所述第一资源为可用资源，所述预设条件为：与所述第一通信协议的传输所占用的资源重叠，且信号质量低于第三阈值。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第三阈值来自于独立配置的阈值表格或阈值集合；或者，
    所述第三阈值是绝对阈值。
  29. 根据权利要求20至28中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述信号质量通过以下信息中的至少一个表征：参考信号接收功率RSRP、接收信号强度指示信息RSSI、信号噪声比SNR、或信号噪声干扰比SINR。
  30. 根据权利要求18至29中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一资源不用于传输数据。
  31. 根据权利要求18至30中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一信息包括以下信息中的至少一项：侧行控制信息SCI、或所述SCI对应的信号质量测量值，所述SCI包括所述第一通信协议的传输的资源指示信息和/或所述第一通信协议的传输的资源预留字段。
  32. 根据权利要求18至31中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一通信协议和所述第二通信协议的资源池使用相同的时频资源。
  33. 根据权利要求18至32中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述控制信息包括以下至少一项：混合自动重传请求HARQ信息、信道状态信息CSI反馈信息、或资源冲突指示信息。
  34. 根据权利要求18至32中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述控制信息为所述第一终端成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的确认ACK信息；或者，
    所述控制信息为所述第一终端没有成功译码来自第二终端的第一数据时向所述第二终端反馈的否认NACK信息。
  35. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器，用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述装置执行如权利要求1至17中任一项所述的方法。
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括所述存储器。
  37. 一种芯片，其特征在于，包括：处理器和通信接口，所述处理器通过所述通信接口读取存储器上存储的指令，执行如权利要求1至17中任一项所述的方法。
  38. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至17中任一项所述的方法。
  39. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，所述计算机程序产品包括用于执行如权利要求1至17中任一项所述的方法的指令。
  40. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括：终端，所述终端用于执行如权利要求1至17中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2023/071864 2022-01-30 2023-01-12 一种控制信息的发送方法和通信装置 WO2023143092A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210114635.9 2022-01-30
CN202210114635.9A CN116582886A (zh) 2022-01-30 2022-01-30 一种控制信息的发送方法和通信装置

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023143092A1 true WO2023143092A1 (zh) 2023-08-03

Family

ID=87470479

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/071864 WO2023143092A1 (zh) 2022-01-30 2023-01-12 一种控制信息的发送方法和通信装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116582886A (zh)
WO (1) WO2023143092A1 (zh)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200029308A1 (en) * 2016-09-30 2020-01-23 Nokia Technologies Oy Resource Processing in a Communication System Using Multipe Protocols
CN110999232A (zh) * 2017-07-12 2020-04-10 美光科技公司 用于优化装置之间的通信路由和网络中的资源重新分配的系统
CN111937330A (zh) * 2018-04-04 2020-11-13 高通股份有限公司 用于混合通信协议的复用规则
CN112398888A (zh) * 2019-08-15 2021-02-23 北京华为数字技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200029308A1 (en) * 2016-09-30 2020-01-23 Nokia Technologies Oy Resource Processing in a Communication System Using Multipe Protocols
CN110999232A (zh) * 2017-07-12 2020-04-10 美光科技公司 用于优化装置之间的通信路由和网络中的资源重新分配的系统
CN111937330A (zh) * 2018-04-04 2020-11-13 高通股份有限公司 用于混合通信协议的复用规则
CN112398888A (zh) * 2019-08-15 2021-02-23 北京华为数字技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116582886A (zh) 2023-08-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11943168B2 (en) Method and apparatus for transmission and reception of sidelink feedback in wireless communication system
US20200403737A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmission or reception of sidelink feedback in communication system
KR102522568B1 (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서 채널 점유 시간 지시 방법 및 장치
RU2725159C1 (ru) Способы и узлы для определения размера блока данных передачи
KR20230054818A (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서 채널 접속 방법 및 장치
KR20220047997A (ko) 전송 방법, 장치, 통신 노드 및 매체
US11791937B2 (en) Method and apparatus for transmission and reception of sidelink control information in wireless communication system
JP7412437B2 (ja) 情報伝送方法、端末デバイス及びネットワークデバイス
KR20220071963A (ko) 데이터 전송 방법 및 장치
WO2021008056A1 (zh) 用于传输侧行数据的方法、终端设备和网络设备
US11812468B2 (en) Method and device for radio resource allocation in wireless communication system
US20220046694A1 (en) Method and apparatus for control and data information resource mapping in wireless cellular communication system
WO2021065153A1 (ja) 端末及び通信方法
US20210321291A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmission and reception of data in communication system
JP2022141774A (ja) 端末、通信方法及び集積回路
KR20200034559A (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서 제어 정보 송수신 방법 및 장치
WO2023143092A1 (zh) 一种控制信息的发送方法和通信装置
WO2020199769A1 (zh) 控制信息的传输方法和装置
EP3739833B1 (en) Data transmission method and device
WO2024032444A1 (zh) 侧行链路通信方法和通信装置
WO2024067025A1 (zh) 侧行链路通信方法和装置
TWI731547B (zh) 用於未授權頻譜中無線通訊的方法
JP7492527B2 (ja) 端末装置、通信方法及び集積回路
CN112740792B (zh) 用于在无线通信系统中发送/接收控制信息的方法和装置
US20240073868A1 (en) Wireless communication method, and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23745975

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1